Home
        MELSECNET/H Interface Board User`s Manual (For SW0DNC
         Contents
1.                                Low speed data    Normal   Normal  link scan i link scan  f            j     i       1  Me1 sending 8 j  2 i    j  a j  I  1 J 1  i  2 1  3    j A j  Ns2 sending g    i 2 i  i g  i    1  j g j  j    i  Ns3 sending   3      9 2 j  1 i   i   e  j  1   i  1  I  ji  Ns4 sending    j  j  j  j     j  i   i   j  i       1  j Transmission processing interva    A  vy        3  Link cycle    Link cycle examples of the low speed transmission are as shown below      a  When  Transmit data of one station in 1 link scan  is set             Transmission processing  interval in  2  Normal       link scan                                        Link cycle          1        gt      b  When  Fixed term cycle interval setting  is set          Transmission processing  interval in  2     Waiting time                         Link cycle  Fixed time interval     SA           c  When  System times  is set          Transmission processing  interval in  2                          Specified time    12 6 12 6    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC       12 2 3 Startup     1  Sending of data for one station per link scan  default   The low speed cyclic data for a maximum of one station is sent in one link scan  of the normal cyclic transmission    Setting method   1  Click      Transmit data of one station in 1 scan  to select   r  Specification of low speed cyclic transmission  Transmit data of one station in 1 scan       Fixed term cycle interval setting  500 Sec         System
2.                     Abnormal   Host disconnected     Normal   Data link enabled        Data link being executed   Data link being stopped   Set after refresh  completion      Executing cyclic  transmission     One or more stations are    All stations normal  abnormal    All stations executing  data link   All stations executing  cyclic transmission     One or more stations are  not executing data link    Baton pass normal   including reserved    Baton pass abnormal   including reserved  stations during online stations during offline   and stations having test and stations having  numbers higher than the   numbers higher than the  maximum station  number     maximum station  number     Executing data link   including reserved  stations and stations  having numbers higher  than the maximum  station number     Station not executing  data link       11 2    11 PROGRAMMING       MELSEC    11 2 Cyclic Transmission    11 3    The link scan of the MELSECNET H and the programmable controller of the user   program operate asynchronously    Depending on the timing of the user program execution  link data with data types of   more than 32 bits  two words   such as the ones below  may be broken up into new   and old data  which may coexist in 16 bit  one word  units    e Floating point data     Current values of positioning module  command speed    The MELSECNETHH provides the following functions for making handling of the link   data easy      32 bit data guarantee  Refer to  Q correspon
3.                OO  sO OFr                      EXT PW  CLASS2 ONLY             GOLF          O          4    o   a    COl e                                                                                                                         TIL Hi Ni coy                         6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC          Shows the MELSECNET H board s operating state   When the LED is lighted up  there are two display formats  one for the normal and the other for  the error      1  Normal Status  The table below shows the LED display when the RUN LED is OFF or ON  In the normal  status  if a communications error occurs  judge that it is an error from the LED state in the  MELSECNETHH utility  Board Information    As for the LED state in the  Board Information  screen  refer to Section 9 2 3   Board  information screen operations       OF   AWDTerrorhas occurred  or the board is being reset      of  A communications erorhasnotoccured    Lighted up A communications error has occurred    on   Datanottransmited CS  L  RUN ERR  on TJ paa notreceive  OoOo  DN Or     2  Error status  The table below shows the LED display when the RUN LED is flickering   O   If an error occurs in the error status  check the details of the error with the Error Viewer or  SD RD Event Viewer   For details  refer to Section 9 4   Error Viewer Operation      a Sinking Indicates the display format is in error status     o dup Indicates the display format is in normal status  Re
4.       Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot        Constant Scan   ms Specification of low speed cyclic transmission  Maximum No of returns to E n   Transmit data of one station in 1 scan  system stations in 1 scan  Station    Fixed term cycle interval setting l Sec     C System times  There is a data link through the    IV sub controlling station when the   Year   Month   Day   Hour   Min    Sec   controlling station is down  fr Dm Pen Pe Per fee  F7 Secured data send 2         I Secured data receive Hun             z  r Transient setting    4   E a E  Maximum no of transients l2 Times 5 EE HAN ea EZ EN    in1 scan   M    of        U eka ma transients  2 Time B TT    T With multiplex transmission          Channel  Selects the channel  MELSECNET H board  performing the settings     Sets a constant link scan   Setting range  1 to 500 ms  If it is not run  do not  input anything     Maximum No  of returns to system stations in  Sets the number of stations with transmission errors that can undergo  1 scan return to system in 1 link scan     With multiplex transmission Set when running the multiplex transmission function     There is a data link through the sub controlling 3      j i bah y Set when executing the control station move function   station when the controlling station is down     Constant scan    Secured data send Set when preventing data separation of link data in station units in cyclic  Secured data receive transmissions        Sets the number of transients that can be e
5.       LY   LB    8    2 x LW    lt  35840 bytes    10 Mbps    Number orStalons Connected 32 Stations  Control station  1  normal station  31   to 1 network    Connection cable Optical fiber cable Coaxial cable  Cable nam   Total extension  cable length stations    Maximum links in 1 station    Total extension cable length in  1 network          Can be extended to 2 5 km  8202 5 ft   using a repeater unit  A6BR10  A6BR10 DC      239  Communications system  Synchronization system  Encoding system NRZI encoding  Non return to Zero inverted   Transfer format  Error control system      Loop back function  optical loop system only  by abnormal detection and cable disconnection     System down prevention through control station     Error detection by the link special relay and link special register     etc   Transient transmission N N communications  Special cyclic transmission Low speed cyclic transmission    Number of boards that can be Maximum 4 boards t   installed    RAS function    Installation slot PC PCI bus slot  half size   Exclusive slots    5V DC Internal current 0 67 A  consumption    Weight 0 11 kg      1  MELSECNET H board communications rate and Mode settings are performed using the MNETH Utility    For details  refer to Section 9 2 3    x2  Depending on the number of stations connected  there are limits to the cable length between stations   For details  refer  to Section 6 4 2     gt 3  The number of boards that can be installed is the combined number of MELSECNET 
6.      Data sent from  other station by  the SEND  instruction       function         RECV  instruction       Received message   Actual data     Received data  are stored to the  target station  channel specified  by the sending  station                           Received data can  be stored up to 128  disregarding the channel numbers                           1  Executed automatically by the driver       The board receives data sent from the other station by the SEND  instruction SEND function  and stores data to the target station channel  specified at the sending side      After the board receives the data  the driver automatically executes the  RECYV instruction and stores the received data to the reception buffer of  the driver  All data received and individually stored to channels of the  board are stored to the one reception buffer of the driver which can store  up to 128 of data      Reads data of the specified channel number in the received order from  the data stored in the reception buffer of the driver using mdReceive  function      lt  Operation when 128 received data are already stored in the reception buffer of  the driver  gt   When 128 received data are already stored in the reception buffer of the  driver  the subsequent data are received by the board once  but the driver  automatically discards those received data at the time of storage to the  reception buffer of the driver   When the sending side sent data with  arrival acknowledgment  execution  type  the 
7.      GI optical fiber cable    2000  6562 ft         62 5 GI optical fiber cable       Not allowed Not allowed          Not allowed 2000  6562 ft      When connecting an optical fiber cable to Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD   J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G and Q80BD   J71LP21GE the restrictions on the bending radius should be observed   For bending radius details  check with the cable to use    Maintain the bending radius of the optical fiber cable within the allowable  range using a tool for securing the optical fiber cable bending radius    This tool may be purchased from Mitsubishi Electric System Service  Inc  or  your nearest dealer  Please inquire for more information    When laying the optical fiber cables  do not touch the fiber cores of the  cable and module connectors  and do not let dust or particles collect on  them    If oil from hands  dust or particles adhere to the cores  the accumulated  transmission loss may cause malfunctions in the data link    Do not detach the cover until the cable is attached    When attaching or detaching the optical fiber cable to from the module  pull  or insert the cable by holding the cable connector securely with your hand   Connect the cable and module connectors securely until you hear a  click   sound    When attaching or detaching the optical fiber cable to from the module   make sure to power off the personal computer and external power supply     6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION        2  Cable c
8.      In the case of the Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  In the case of the Q80BD J71BR11  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G and Q80BD J71LP21GE    A  for the coaxial bus system    for the optical loop system     o            Do not connect  anything   oer A OTTO oy  getting in                  2  Set the mode setting in the  Board Information  screen of the MNETH utility on   Internal self loopback test      Board Set          Internal self loopback test Setting       6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC        3  Click the   Board Set   button in the  Board Information screen of the MNETH    utility to run the Internal self loopback test  checking the LED status in the  Board  Information  screen to confirm the execution state   T  PASS blinks during the test   If T  PASS blinks 20 times and ERROR LED does not blink  the test is completed  normally   Also  if the test ends abnormally  the ERROR LED will blink as shown below to  indicate the relevant error information    a  Optical Loop System   Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD   J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE   1  The  CRC    OVER    AB IF    TIME    DATA  and  UNDER  LEDs  light up      Hardware error      b  Coaxial Bus System  Q80BD J71BR11   2  The  CRC    OVER    AB IF    TIME    DATA  and  UNDER  LEDs  light up      Hardware error     If an error occurs in the coaxial bus system  the  M S E  LED or  PRM E  LED may  light up besides the  CRC    OVER    AB IF    TIME   
9.      Windows Server   2008  and Windows   7                       App 28  Appendix 11 Combinations of Boards with Existing Software               cccccecscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeees App 29  Appendix 11 1 Installing MELSECPowerManaget                 ccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeeeneeteneeteeeseeeees App 29  Appendix 11 2 Uninstalling MELSECPowerMana Ge             2  c  ccececeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeseeeeseeees App 29  Appendix 11 3 Checking MELSECPowerManaget                  ccecceeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeseeeseneeseaeensneeees App 30    MANUALS    The following table lists the manuals relevant to this product     You can order them as necessary   Relevant Manuals    Manual Name Manual Number  Model Code  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network  Tera    This manual explains the system configuration  performance specification  function  handling  wiring and  13JF92   troubleshooting for MELSECNET H network system   Option     For QnA A4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual O    This manual explains the system configuration  performance specification  function  handling  wiring and  13JF78     troubleshooting for MELSECNET 10 network system   Option     Type A70BDE J71QLP23 A70BDE J7 1QLP23GE A70BDE J71QBR13 A70BDE J71QLR23    MELSECNET 10 Interface Board User s Manual  For SW3DNF MNET10  IB 0800035  This manual explains the system configuration  performance specification  function  handl
10.     Before system switching Personal computer   MELSECNETHH board  Station No  3                      MELSECNET H   Network No 1                       Control system J  Standby system                                  Tracking cable  Station No  1 Station No  2                                  After system switching Personal computer   MELSECNET H board           Station No  3                                              MELSECNET H   Network No 1        Control system  j ye  A    Standby system I Control system  Tracking cable      Station No  1    Station No  2                                                                                               To judge which system in the Redundant CPU system is being accessed by MELSECNET H  board  create a program to monitor the following special relays      1  When checking which system is being accessed  System A or System B  System A     Identifies system A system B of a redundant system   SM1511   identification      Remains ON OFF even if the tracking cable is disconnected while the redundant system  flag is running     System A   System B At the time of TRK CABLE ERR  Error code   y y 6120  occurrence  System not determined    System B  SM1512    identification     sm5   on   oF  OFF   _    fiag     2  When checking the operation system status    e Indicates the CPU module operation status  SM1515 e Remains ON OFF even if the tracking cable is disconnected while the redundant system  Control  is running   Standby Control   
11.     Details may not be displayed for some sources   aooo  se 00 0000 oD 1   T   10 h    dure  EA A i JN 0 0i  j    Displays details when the contents of a driver  or buffer memory are referenced     Details may not be displayed for some sources     0020  00 00 0000 0000 00 00  0028  00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 a          Cinse        Nexen   N ERN ee      L Displays the details of the next error log information                       Displays the details of the previous error log information   Closes this dialog box     Updates the data currently being displayed     10 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY  MELSEC       10 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY    This chapter describes the functional overview offered by the library   10 1 Overview of the MELSEC Data Link Library    These functions are used when creating a user program that communicates with a  programmable controller CPU  With the functions  the user can perform  communication without being conscious of the hardware type on the opposite side or  the communication protocol     Personal computer    The user can communicate with a  specified programmable controller  easily without being conscious of   the communication protocol                                                                                MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10  network module network module       10 1 10 1    10    10 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY       10 2 Function List    10 2       MELSEC    The following table lists the MELSEC data link library that is provided with the  ME
12.    Cause Determination Methods by Type  NO of Trouble            Is there a driver  error message displayed in the  event viewer of the control    tool   Process in accordance with the error  NO contents in section 14 3 1     Start the MNETH utility     Did the MNETH    YES                                                              utility start operating normally NO  and display the correct number of  loaded MELSECNET H    boards  Remove other optical board s  and leave  only the MELSECNET H board s    YES  Did the MNETH  utility start operating normally YES  and display the correct number of    loaded MELSECNET H  Check the resource acquisition state of  other option board resources and change  Is the  RUN  NO NO the resources using the BIOS setting screen    or the Device Manager     LED on the MELSECNET H  board lit               Is there a driver  error message displayed in the  event viewer of the control  tool     YES    YES    NO  Process in accordance with the error  END Replace the MELSECNETIH board    contents in section 14 3 1      4  For Windows Vista   and Windows   7  a    mark is displayed when the driver is  registered normally              14 6 14 6    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       14 3 1 Table of error event messages that may occur during driver startup    Event logs related to the MELSECNET H board are displayed as  AMneth  in the  Source field on the Event Viewer screen   The following table lists the errors displayed in the event viewer e
13.    SWODNC MNETH B 11M   Click  _     H   m MELSECNET H utility 2004 10 28             Copyright C  2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION  All Rights Reserved              Device Monitor Help       Appendix 8 New and Improved Functions    The following table shows the new and the improved functions in the MELSECNET H board     Newand improved funeti  n First five digits of the serial Software version of     number SWODNC MNETH B       MELSECNET H Extended mode 06112 or higher 11M or later    App   25 App   25    APPENDIX MELSEC       Appendix 9 External Dimensions    Appendix 9 1 Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE    147  5 79                 153  6 02   140  5 51                                                                                                                     unit  mm  inch      153  6 02   147  5 79                                      153  6 02   140  5 51     Li Ml       42  1 65                                                                                                                     unit  mm  inch         App   26 App   26    APPENDIX MELSEC       Appendix 9 3 Q80BD J71BR11          153  6 02        147  5 79     141  5 55        1                               OL N im                    unit  mm  inch      147  5 79                             153  6 02   140  5 51                                                                                                                                                               unit  mm 
14.    There is a data link through the pesene  IV sub cor  trolling station when the EECH Month   Day   Hour   Min    Sec   controlling station is down  1 JERE ESEN       I    Secured data send 2   Herin  I    Secured data receive    Transient setting   Maximum no of transients   gt  Ti   in1 scan  m  Maximum no of transients   gt  f   in one station Times          Transient setting     1  By increasing the number of transients  multiple transient instructions can be  executed at the same time  in one link scan      2  If the number of transients is increased and the transient request was issued in  each station at the same time  the link scan time becomes temporarily longer    and the cyclic transmission is also affected  Do no set unnecessarily large  values     3  When the transient transmission and the low speed cyclic transmission are  used at the same time  these transient setting parameters limit the total number  of transient and low speed cyclic transmissions        12 10    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       MELSEC     2  Transient transmission range  In a multiple network system of the MELSECNET H  communication can be  performed with stations in a maximum of eight networks by setting the routing  parameters described in Section 12 3 2   The following diagram illustrates the transient transmission range using an  example where the destinations are limited to eight networks      Gate 1   Gate 2   Gate 3        QCPU  1Mp1 QCPU  1Ns2   2Mp1 QCPU          2Ns2   3Ns3 QCPU  3N
15.    YES       Did the OS start normally     2   NO Go to the next page                 After formatting the HD  reinstall  OS and each application software  and start     NO       Did the OS start normally          Contact the PC  manufacturer             Load only the MELSECNET H board  and install the driver package     Did the OS start normally        Check using the flowcharts in  Section 14 3           1   Go to the next page     14 19 14 19    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       1  2          Change the user program in which  the error occurred and create a  program that is valid only in the  areas of Data Link functions   Execute the program continuously  for a sufficient period                Did the same error occur  again                  Refer to Section 14 9 Information  Needed when Calling with Inquiry  and contact our call center     NO    If other option boards are being used   carry out an additional installation     Did the OS start normally            1  Check the setting of the added  optical board   2  Replace the added optical board                     Change the user program in which  the error occurred and create a  program that is valid only in the  areas of communication functions   then slowly add process to the  program    Execute the program continuously  for a sufficient period            YES        Did the same error occur  again             Check the added sections of the use  program     YES  i           Did the user program return  to t
16.    gt 10FF 1000 lt   gt 10FF     1000 lt   gt 10FF Change              3 Reverce  1100 lt   gt 11FF 1100 lt   gt 11FF 1100 lt   gt 11FF 1100 lt   gt 11FF  1 1200 lt   gt 12FF   1200x  gt 12FF 1200 lt   gt 12FF         Delete    Setting Clear                                  Check IL ox   Cancel   Help      Selects the channel  MELSECNET H board  performing the settings   Block 1 setting  Block 2 setting   Switches the block that is set     Input the total number of stations  including the control station  in the network that the  MELSECNET H board is the control station for     Monitoring Time Sets the link scan time monitoring time   I O Master Sta  Input the station No  of the I O master station   Input the station No  of the station to be set or changed     Sending Range  Assigns link devices  LX  LY  1 to 1 between the I O master station  M station  and other  Send Range for presi no a  Each Station   2     stations   l      Total station    Sending Range  Assigns link devices  LX  LY  1 to 1 between the I O master station  M station  and other   MeL  stations    1    button Registers the set contents in each station s transmission range   Send Range for Each Station Displays the set data contents up to the present time in one list     Select the line to change  then when the button is clicked  the data which are registered  button can be changed   If the line to be changed is double clicked  the same operation can be  performed      button Select the line to change  then
17.    gt 2BFF 2900 lt   2BFF      N AN A         Send range   2000 to 3FFF               1  The total of the send ranges per station must not exceed 2000 bytes in the low   speed cyclic transmission   The send range for the normal cyclic transmission    is not included      2  The LX and LY cannot be set as low speed cyclic devices     3  Low speed cyclic transmission function cannot be used during  MELSECNET 10 mode        12 3    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       12 2 2 Send timing    12 4    MELSEC    The low speed cyclic transmission is executed separately from the normal cyclic  transmission  This section describes the setting  processing interval and link cycle of  the low speed cyclic transmission      1  Transmission setting  The link cycle of the low speed cyclic transmission varies depending on its  transmission setting   The setting can be made at  Specification of low speed cyclic transmission  on   Supplementary setting    Refer to Section 12 3 1    The following lists the setting options     Setting item    Transmit data of one station   Low speed cyclic data of max  one station are sent during  in 1 link scan one link scan of normal cyclic transmission     Fixed term cycle interval Low speed cyclic data are sent at a specified time  setting interval    1    System times Low speed cyclic data are sent at a specified time          x1  Maximum no  of stations capable of sending data during 1 link scan of  normal cyclic transmission varies depending on the  Maximum no  o
18.   9 4 Error Viewer Operation                   ELEEEkk knee kk kk keka kk ka kaka kk ka kr Ak KAKA KK A KAKA KAKA KAKA KA KA HA KA KA KA HA KA HAH KA A KAKA 9 37    9 4 1  S  er  en d   Ser DIO   gt 4   lt   yyy e edea dz eyaz elie Para a kak i a e eke   VA Dan l     9 37  QA 2 Log mem eg ncaa ce aa ected cae KE y   renk ee derke Ani anek   n der kenek era kra en   rakeve ac Ke w  n eee r  ke Keyay   S   ek   9 38  94 3 Display Men  s eee   e gt        o      o   ppppp  n     h r r_r_rmrmrrrr rk 9 39   10 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 10  1 to 10  2  10 1 Overview of the MELSEC Data Link Li  DIrary                uk kk kk ka kk AKA AKA AA AA KA ARA KA AA 10  1  10 2    Function  L  SL   s   sual suwal n h  ni Wak naa ae   a n ke inion wi lawana ode   k w   ke w  na V  na      b   iE nena E V  k wi den   deh  n 10  2  11 PROGRAMMING 11  1to11  6  11 1 Cautions in Programming 220 0  eet en i WAA E   kan   ee niente AW RAWA AN ene re A WA AW  NE W     a a 11  1  11 1 1 Interlock related SigmalS  i a 4 213   a    QE yal   an a ai W      a WA   WAA 11  1  41 2  Cyclic  Transinne S  Q   cs A 3614  aa a mahek k  l   Kar ceed kak KINA   k Ke ah guna E dacs   e kewe KAKA   k Kek ky ena DEKA yew   Ku ARAA 11  3  11 2 1 Block guarantee of cyclic data per Stat  On                    LE kk kk keka KAKA AKA kek AYA 11  4  11 3 Link Special Relays  SB  Registers  SW         l E ii EiiiiiEEEk keke kak k kk KAKA KK KAK AKA KAK AK AK AA 11  5  12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 12  1 to 12 26  12 1 Direct Ac
19.   98                   Windows   7       Windows Server   2003 R2       Windows Server   2008       Windows Server         Windows         GX Developer       MX Links       MX Component       MELSECNET 10          Generic Term Abbreviation Description    Generic term for AOJ2HCPU  A1SCPU  A1SCPU S1  A1SCPUC24 R2  A1SHCPU   A1SJCPU  A1SJCPU S3  A1SJHCPU  A1NCPU  A2CCPU  A2CCPUC24  A2CCPUC24   PRF  A2CJCPU  A2NCPU  A2NCPU S1  A2SCPU  A2SCPU S1  A2SHCPU  A3NCPU   A1FXCPU        AnACPU    Generic term for AZACPU  A2ACPU S1  A2ACPUP21 R21  A2ZACPUP21 R21 S1   A3ACPUP21 R21  A3ACPU        AnUCPU    Generic term for AZUCPU  AZUCPU S1  AZASCPU  AZASCPU S1  A2ZASCPU S30   A2USHCPU S1  A3UCPU  A4UCPU        ACPU    Generic term for ANNCPU  AnACPU  AnUCPU        QnACPU    Generic term for Q2ACPU  Q2ACPU S1  Q2ASCPU  Q2ASCPU S1  Q2ASHCPU   Q2ASHCPU S1  Q3ACPU  Q4ACPU  Q4ARCPU        QCPU  A mode     Generic term for Q02CPU A  QO2HCPU A and QO6HCPU A        Basic model QCPU    Generic term for QOOJCPU  QOOCPU and Q01CPU       Universal model QCPU    Generic term for QQOUJCPU  QOOUCPU  Q01UCPU  QO2UCPU  QO03UDCPU   QO3UDVCPU  QO03UDECPU  Q04UDHCPU  QO04UDVCPU  QO4UDEHCPU  QO6UDHCPU   QO6UDVCPU  QO6UDEHCPU  Q10UDHCPU  Q10UDEHCPU  Q13UDHCPU  Q13UDVCPU   Q13UDEHCPU  Q20UDHCPU  Q20UDEHCPU  Q26UDHCPU  Q26UDVCPU   Q26UDEHCPU  Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU        High Performance model  QCPU    Generic term for QO2CPU  QO2HCPU  QO6HCPU  Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU       Process CPU    Generic term for Q12PH
20.   A80BDE A2USH S1 N  ANU B    ISW1DNF ANU B   DNF ANU B    Q80BD J61BT11N SW1DNC CCBD2 B    Q80BD J71GP21 SX   Q80BD J71GP21S SX   Q81BD J71GP21 SX   Q81BD J71GP21S SX   Q81BD J71GF11 T2 SW1DNC CCIEF B             SW1DNC MNETG B          Win 95   Windows   95 Win 98   Windows   98 NT 4 0   Windows NT   Workstation 4 0  Win 2000   Windows   2000Professional Win XP  Windows   XP Professional Server 2003  Windows Server   2003 R2  Vista   Windows Vista   Server 2008  Windows Server   2008 Win 7  Windows   7         Can be operated simultaneously   ZA   Operable simultaneously for versions indicated in the parentheses or later   x   Cannot be operated simultaneously        1  Update the version of each software if it is used with the MELSECNET H board on the same PC   For details on version update products  contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representative     App   18 App   18    APPENDIX MELSEC       2  For Q81BD J71LP21 25    Supported OS    Board model name Software package name Server Server  Win 2000   Win XP Vista Win 7  2003 2008    SWOIVDWT MNET10P    A70BDE J71QLP23  SW1IVDWT MNET10P  AA70BDE J71QLP23G a    A7OBDE J71QBR13   SW2DNF MNET10  SW3DNF MNET10    A70BDE J71QLR23 SW3DNF MNET10  SW3DNF CCLINK  SW4DNF CCLINK B O   A  40E    x  SWODNF CCLINK  SW1DNF CCLINK  A80BDE J61BT13 SWZDNF CCLINK  SW3DNF CCLINK                         AASOBDE J61BT11                            SW4DNF CCLINK B O   A  40E    x   SWODNF ANU       A80BD A2USH S1 SWODNF ANU B   SW1DN
21.   Calculator    MX    Documents    Sticky Notes    a J Paint  Q Snipping Tool    XPS Viewer    Pictures  Music  Computer  Control Panel    g Windows Fax and Scan  Devices and Printers    Le Remote Desktop Connection  o Default Programs    e    Magnifier Help and Support     gt  All Programs                          an z   Eza 2  Select  System and Securily      Adjust your computer s settings View by  Category       System and Security  amp  User Accounts and Family Safety  WBA Review your computer s status   Add or remove user accounts  N x   can setup prt confor ay ye    Find and fix problems    Network and Internet  A    View network status and tasks    Appearance and Personalization  Change the theme   Change desktop background   Adjust screen resclution   Choose homegroup and sharing options    ae n   Clock  Language  and Region     lt  Qela SEKIR Change keyboards or other input methods  Adda device    Ease of Access  Connect t   ctor        Let Windows suggest settings  used mobility settings NAB  T optimize visual display       Programs  Kal Urata pases       Adjust comm                 amm     c   EEE JO EZZEZZIZE z 3  Select  Change User Account Control settings      Control Pane  Home       Action Center  Review your computer s status and resolve issues     Change User Account Control settings   Troubleshoot common computer problems  Restore your computer to an eatiertime       System and Security  Netwerk and Internet  Hardware and Sound    a   Widens preval  Progr
22.   MELSECNET H Common parameter setting    B W setting   xY setting   Reserved station setting   Supplementary setting      j Channel 51 MELSECNET H  1 slot                            r Data Setting  Send Range Setting for Each Station  Total Station ja Sta No  js Pairing  No Pairs z  ETT Set  ow Speer  Monitoring Fran Send Range for LB Em j  OFFF LB   j    Timelmsl Each Station uwioeco      OFFF wl    gt  HEMI             r Send Range for Each Station    staNo   LB  Lw   Low Speed LB  Low Speed Lw  r a    HETI  2 0000 lt   01FF Change    l2     02004 lt    03FF   0200 lt    03FF   I3 J  0400 lt   gt 05FF   0400 lt    05FF Delete    l4     0600 lt    07FF   0600 lt    07FF   I5  0800   09FF 0800 lt  09FF Setting Clear    I5      0A004   0BFF 0400 lt   gt 0BFF   Iz     0C00 lt     gt 0DFF   0C00 lt    0DFF   8    D  E     lt   gt   FFF  OE00 lt   0FFF                             Check OK Cancel Help  Es ones        In order to validate the guarantee of 32 bit data  it is necessary that the number of  points in each station s transmission range be a multiple of 20H for LB and a    multiple of 2 for LW and that each station s top device No  be set so that the LB is a  multiple of 20H and the LW is a multiple of 2   For details on guaranteeing 32 bit  data  refer to the  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference  Manual  PLC to PLC Network           7 PARAMETER SETTIN      MELSEC       7 3 2 Send range for each station  LX LY settings     Set send ranges for each statio
23.   automatically depending on the settings on the  personal computer  Do not disable MELSECPowerManager because the  MELSECNET H board does not function normally if the personal computer enters  the power save mode  hibernate  sleep   For the behavior of the board when the  personal computer enters the power save mode  hibernate  sleep   refer to  Appendix 10    e If MELSECPowerManager is disabled accidentally  right click   MELSECPowerManager  on the  Services  Local   screen and select  Start  from  the menu              Services   File Action View Help   es EI Ei         B        aun    Services  Local      Services  Local        MELSECPowerManager Name i Description Status Startup Type Log On As  Media Center Extender S   Allows Med  Disabled Local Service  Start the service BI MELSECPowerM PAPERE EAE  Microsoft NET Framew    Disabled Local System  Microsoft NET Framew   Disabled Local System  J Microsoft NET Framew    Automatic  D    Local System  J Microsoft NET Framew    Automatic  D    Local System  Microsoft iSCSI Initiator    Manual Local System  j     Microsoft Software Sha    Manual Local System      J  Multimedia Class Sched  All Tasks Automatic Local System      Net Msmg Listener Ada    Disabled Network Servic  Refresh  J Net Pipe Listener Adapter Disabled Local Service  Net Tcp Listener Adapter Properties Disabled Local Service  Net Tcp Port Sharing Se   Disabled Local Service  j  Netlogon Help Manual Local System    Network Access Protecti    The Networ   Manua
24.   is available  the following  warning screen appears  Select  Allow  or   YES   button to run the utility                  lt Using Windows Vista    lt Using Windows   7 gt   Windows Server   2008 gt     j la    User Account Control  e  1  User Account Control a    O An unidentified program wants access to your computer D REYA Ker TONNE    SUAE ee from ah s  unknown publisher make changes to this computer           Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it  before  Program name  NETHUTLexe    P T    NETHUTL exe Publisher  Unknown  Unidentified Publisher File origin  Hard drive on this computer      Cancel Y  Show details  Ne     I don t know where this program is from or what it s for     Change when these notifications appear             i  gt  Allow  H I trust this program  I know where it s from or I ve used it before i       LY  Details    User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer        For details on how to prevent this screen from being displayed  refer to  Appendix 5        9 1 1 Starting a utility    Start an utility by clicking one of the following menus inside  Start     All Programs   1      MELSEC  menu        AllPrograms  gt   fq MELSEC     lt     Starts the device monitor utility   SS  MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual  Wisor  O ig rarae nue  lt      Starts the MNETH utility     K    Device Monitor Utility              Z start BEY        lt        Starts the error viewer          S MELSECNET_H U
25.   make a clean cut  without leaving any stray    pieces or loose strands  Failure to do so may cause a short circuit or  result in an improper crimp        Cut the aluminum  tape up to here     2  Insert a center contact pin into the internal conductor  Crimp the pin    using a crimp tool to seal the gap between the center contact pin and  the insulating material        Center contact pin 4    1  Use a crimp tool specified for a BNC connector          2  Do not crimp the junction of the insulating material and the center contact pin     3  Horizontally insert the center contact pin into the insulating material and crimp  the pin  If the pin is on the tilt  straight it        6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       3  After the crimp  check the crimp height of the crimp part  When the  crimp height at the measurement position is between 1 4mm and  1 5mm  the pin is properly crimped    If the crimp height is not between 1 4mm and 1 5mm  adjust the crimp  tool and crimp the center contact pin again           Measurement position of Cross section of  crimp height the measurement position    A  i 1 5mm to 2 0mm    3e s4 E  j ore w  GE 1 A B    N   Crimp height value   gt  mm  Crimp part    4  Hold the root of the coaxial cable and fully insert the cable into a plug   After inserting the cable  pull it lightly to check that the center contact  pin is fixed    Move the crimp sleeve until it contacts with the plug                    5  Crimp the crimp slee
26.   so  change them using the BIOS setting screen  or the Device Manager so that they do not  overlap                       and display the correct number of  loaded MELSECNET H  boards              NO       Is there a driver  error message displayed in  the error viewer     YES       NO       Replece the MELSECNET H boards               Check the resource acquisition state of  other option board resources and change  the resources using the BIOS setting screen  or the Device Manager           Process in accordance with the error  contents in section 14 3 1     14 5    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC        2  For Windows   7  Windows Vista     Windows   XP  Windows  Server   2003 R2  Windows   2000  Windows NTe           Did the screen  turn blue during OS startup and  displsy system error     YES             Remove all MELSECNET H boards     NO         Did the screen  turn blue during OS startupand  displsy system error     NO       The resources used by the MELSECNET H  board  IRQ  I O address  etc   are conflicting  with those used by the system used in the            Reinstall the Windows    or call Microsoft    personal computer or by another board  so  change them using the BIOS setting screen    or the Device Manager so that they do not  overlap               Is a    mark displayed next   to the  PCI MELSECNET H Controller   item in the Device Manager  screen         ES           Process in accordance with  The driver is  not normally installed  in section 14 2   
27.  10 board  with the MELSECNET 10 board of __ installed in the personal computer is used   specified I O port and the channel of  The MELSECNET 10 board that is used is   the remainder is used the designated by that MELSECNET H board s I O  MELSECNET H board  port     Channel      Sets the channel  MELSECNET H board  which sets the link device access method        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       Sets the access method to link devices  LX  LY  LB  LW      Makes access to the MELSECNET H driver buffer    Data in the MELSECNET H driver buffer and the refresh data storage  area on the MELSECNETI H board are updated by link refresh    When secured data handling is specified with the control station  parameter  data consistency     of link device data is ensured     Personal computer MELSECNETI H board                Reading  l lt             User i  MELSECNET H Refresh data  program   drive buffer storage area    cc Link refresh  Writing                                           When Link Refresh is selected  specify the link refresh interval  Link   Link Device Access Method refresh is performed at intervals of the specified value x link scan time   Interval      The load of the link refresh processing by the MELSECNET H driver   on the PC decrease in inverse proportion to this value     Setting range  1 to 1000  Default  1    Provided for MELSECNET 10 compatibility    Makes access to the refresh data storage area on the   MELSECNETIH board   Data consistency   1 of link devi
28.  25  Q80BD J71LP21G    Q80BD J71LP21GE    MNET H  Coaxial  Q80BD J71BR11    Channel No  Confirm   Button Displays the  Channel No  Confirm  screen     For details  refer to  2    Channel No  Confirm    Displays the  Channel No  Setting  screen   For details  refer to  3    Channel No  Setting      Channel numbers may change due to board replacements or alternations of PC  device configurations  In such cases  check channel numbers and parameter  settings with the    Board list    and    Board information    screens    9 7 9 7    Channel No  Setting   Button       TILITY OPERATION  ile     adi MELSEC        2  Channel No  Confirm Screen  Clicking the   Channel No  Confirm   screen in the  Board List  screen displays    the following dialog box  and enables the user to check the channel No  by the  status of the display LED s on the MELSECNET H board     MELSECNETZH Channel No  Confirm      Channel No  Confirm      Channel No  can be confirmed with LED of the board   LED corresponding to Channel No  of the board is as follows   LED return to normal status when OK button is pushed     m LED Image    Channel No   or j2 js ps          E   Z  mr  29  Ezi          zZ  mr    2o9  7  5  S     me  2o      E         mre  29  o             Channel No  Displays the channel No  of the installed MELSECNET H board   Displays the display LED lighting on status on the MELSECNET H board         3  Channel No  Setting Screen  Clicking the   Channel No  Setting   screen in the  Board List  screen
29.  3     Section 15 4 4  Appendix 3 to 6 changed to Appendix 2 to 5    Addition  Appendix 5 4    Appendix 2  Appendix 2 1    Jun   2008   SH NA  080128 O  Section 1 3  Section 2 5  Section 9 2 4  Section 15 4 4     Appendix 4 2    Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Section 2 5  Section 10 1 2  Product List  Chapter 5  Appendix 4 1    Oct   2009   SH NA  080128 R Addition  Section 8 1 3  Section 11 4  Section 13 3 4  Section 15 2  SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  Section 2 6  Section 4 1  Section 11 6     Section 11 7  Section 12 1 1  Section 13  Section 13 1  Section 14         The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover     Print Date    Manual Number    Dec   2010   SH NA  080128 T  Section 2 5    Mar   2011   SH NA  080128 U   Addition    Appendix 2    Correction    Product List  Chapter 7  Section 9 2 2  Section 15 2  Appendix 1   Appendix 5 2  Appendix 3 to 6 changed to Appendix 4 to 7    May  2011   SH NA  080128 V    Precautions for Use  Chapter 8    Section 8 3    Sep   2011  SH NA  080128 W  SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  INTRODUCTION  Manuals   How to Use This Manual  Generic Terms and Abbreviations   Product List  Section 1 2  Section 2 1  Section 2 5  Section 3 1   Section 3 2  Section 5 1 1  Section 6 2 1  Chapter 7  Section 8 1   Section 8 1 1  Section 8 1 2  Section 8 1 3  Section 8 2  Section 9 1 1   Section 9 3 5  Section 9 3 6  Section 9 3 7  Section 9 3 8  Chapter 10   Section 10 2  Section 12 3 4  Chapter 13  Section 14 2  Section 14 3 1   Section 14 4 1  Section 
30.  Action    Standby mode of operating system is not supported  System standby error is displayed  for MELSECNET H board   xl Depending on a personal computer  standby mode    The device driver for the  PCI MELSECNET H Controller  device is preventing the machine a i A    from entering standby  Please close all applications and try again  IF the problem may be set by the power switch operation setting or    persists  you may need to update this driver   the uninterruptible power system  UPS  setting   Disable the standby mode on the Control Panel of the  operating system   ACPU QnACPU QCPU  A mode  cannot be accessed  with the 64 bit version of user application        ACPU QnACPU QCPU  A mode  cannot be accessed    Use 32 bit version of user application     e When  AnyCPU   is selected for the target CPU in  Microsoft   Visual Basic     select  x86         1  Check if the display settings on the  Device  Manager  or other relevant functions are correct   Treun a aes and install an appropriate display driver   e utility screen is not displayed properly   Ka ji A Rayed PISPeny  Or update the Windows   operating system   The operations of utility cannot be performed  ne  2  Close the other applications   3  Change the Hardware accelerator setting of the    display setting        14 4 14 4    14 TROUBLESHOOTING       MELSEC    14 3 Flowchart to Use when MELSECNET H Board did not Operate Normally    The following describes a flowchart that must be checked for each PC when an  MELSEC
31.  D     NA  080128 E     NA  080128 F    Model addition  Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE    Section 1 3  Appendix 3 1    About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Section 1 2  Section 1 3   Section 2 5  Section 7 1  Section 7 1 1  Section 7 1 2  Section 7 4   Section 8 2 3  Section 9 1 2  Section 9 2  Section 10 3 2  Section 10 4   Appendix 3  Appendix 3 1    Addition    Section 10 8  Section 12 2  Chapter 13    Correction    Section 2 5  Section 3 1  Section 3 2  Section 5 6  Section 9 1 2   Section 10 7  Section 12 2  Section 12 2 2    Addition  About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Sections 9 1 2   Chapter 13    Safety Precautions  Section 8 2 3  Section 8 2 8  Section 8 3 3   Section 9 1 2  Chapter 10  Section 12 2  Appendix 3 1  Appendix 4 1   Appendix 4 2    Addition   Precautions for use  Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Section 1 2   Section 1 3  Section 2 5  Section 5 4 2  Section 7 1 1  Section 7 1 2   Section 7 2  Section 7 3  Section 8 1 1  Section 10 3  Chapter 13   Section 14 3  Section 14 3 1  Section 14 5 4  Section 14 6    Safety Precautions  Precautions for use  Section 3 1  Section 3 2   Section 6 3 1  Section 8 2 5  Section 8 2 10  Section 12 2  Section 12 2 1   Section 12 2 2  Section 12 2 3  Section 12 3 3  Chapter 13    Section 14 4 4  Section 14 7  Appendix 5 1    Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Section 1 2  Section 1 3  Section 2 4   Section 2 5  Section 4 2 1  Section 5 2 1  Section 5 3  Section 5 4 3   Chapter 6  Section 6 3 6  Section 8 2 1  
32.  DATA  and  UNDER  LEDs  lighting up    When requesting repairs of the MELSECNET H board  be sure to inform the service  technician of the LED lighting state     6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       6 5 3 H W test    This test checks the internal hardware on the MELSECNET H board      1  Connect the optical fiber cables to the IN and OUT sides of the Q80BD J71LP21   25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G and Q80BD   J71LP21GE  for the optical loop system     In the case of the Q80BD J71BR11  for the coaxial bus system   do not connect  a Type F connector or any terminal resistors     In the case of the Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  In the case of the Q80BD J71BR11    Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G and Q80BD J71LP21GE  for the coaxial bus system    for the optical loop system     Do not connect  anything           9 T                 2  Set the  H W test  in the mode settings in the  Board Information  screen of the  MNETH utility     Board Set    Setting           3  Click the   Board Set   button in the  Board Information  screen in the MNETH    utility to run the H W test  and check the execution state by the status of the   LED s in the  Board Information  screen    T  PASS blinks during the test    If T  PASS blinks 20 times and ERROR LED does not blink  the test is completed   normally    Also  if the test ends abnormally  the ERROR LED will blink as shown below to   indicate the relevant error information     a  B
33.  Driver Installation x         The driver software you are installing for   H  WinDriver  has not been properly signed with Authenticade TM  technology  Therefore  Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified  since it was published  The publisher s identity cannot be verified  because of a problem     The signature contains a time stamp  However  the time stamp  could not be verified     Do you still want to install this driver software     j No More Info          Found New Hardware Wizard    Welcome to the Found New  Hardware Wizard     Windows will search for curent and updated software by    Joking on your computer  an the hardware installation CD  or on  the Windows Update Web site  with your permission      Read out privacy policy    Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for  software     O Yes  this time only  C Yez  now and every time   connect a device  ONG Ba tine    Click Next to continue           This screen is displayed at the first installation    Click the   Continue Anyway   button    The operation test has been conducted by Mitsubishi    Problems do not occur after the installation     The following screen may appear behind another  screen  Then  press the   Alt       Tab   keys to bring it to  the front                                   For Windows   Server   2003 R2  one of the screens  shown on the left is displayed at the first installation     Click the button     For operating system of Windows   XP Service Pack2  or later  the confi
34.  For optical loop     Displays the station number that requested a loop switch and  Loop Switching Sta  No  loop back   Displays the factor by which loop switch and loop back were  Factor  executed     Switched to Displays the data link status after a loop switch        TILITY OPERATION  _ 2 2 MELSEC       Displays the error code occurring when transient transmission was executed at the host     Transient Transmission Error Displays the code of the error occurring due to transient transmission   Error type Displays the type of the error occurring due to transient transmission     Displays the number of error occurrences     Loop Switching Displays the number of loop switch loopback     Transient Displays the number of error occurrence due to transient  Transmission transmission        Displays the number of retries  retry at communication error    Link Trouble Displays the number of line error occurrence        Displays the number of UNDER errors     Displays the number of CRC errors     Displays the number of OVER errors     Displays the number of short frame  data  Short Frame     Communication message is too short   errors   Error Displays the number of AB IF errors   Displays the number of Time Out errors     Exceeding 2 kb Displays the number of Exceeding 2Kb  errors     Displays the number of DPLL  Cannot       Error Count   1               DPLL Error identify data normally due to  synchronization modulation  errors     TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC        1   The foll
35.  H  10 Mbps  Optical Loop  Q80BD J71LP21G MELSECNET H Extended Mode   System  Q80BD J71LP21GE    MELSECNET 10 Optical Loop System         By adopting the PCI PCI Express   standard  complicated switch  settings are no longer required    The system can be used simply by installing the MELSECNET H board in the  personal computer  then installing the software     The channel No   station No  and other settings can be carried out easily in the  MNETH Utility      3  Compatibility with the previous MELSECNET 10 board   s operations   is maintained     a  Upward compatibility of user programs  The MELSECNETH H board is the same as the previous MELSECNET 10  board when it comes to the maximum number of boards that can be  installed in a personal computer  No  of MELSECNET 10 boards and  MELSECNET H boards combined  and the channel No   etc  so you can  continue to use your existing MELSECNET 10 boards     b  Compatible with the GX Developer  MX Links and MX  Component   It is possible to access the programmable controller CPU using the GX    Developer  MX Links and MX Component from a personal computer where  the MELSECNETHH board is installed     1 OVERVIEW MELSEC        4  Compatible with QCPU  Q Mode  multiple CPU systems   By using logical station No  station designations in the MNETH utility  it is  possible to communicate with each CPU  Q Mode  in a multiple CPU system      5  Compatible with redundant CPU systems   Only by specifying whether the destination is a control or st
36.  LED lights up    The forward loop cable is broken     The forward loop s transmission side and reception side cables are  not connected     2   DATA  LED lights up    The reverse loop cable is broken     The reverse loop s transmission side and reception side cables are  not connected     3  The  CRC    OVER  and  AB IF  LEDs light up on the F LOOP and  R LOOP sides    The cable is defective   4   UNDER  LED lights up    Hardware error     The cable was disconnected during the test     The cable was broken during the test     Coaxial Bus System  Q80BD J71BR11   1   TIME  LED lights up      The connector is disconnected   2  The CRC    OVER  and  AB IF  LEDs light up on the F LOOP and  R LOOP sides    The connector is defective   3   DATA  and  UNDER  LED lights up     Hardware error     The connector was disconnected during the test     6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION       MELSEC    6 5 2 Internal self loopback test    In this section  a check of the hardware  including the transmission and reception lines  in the transmission on the MELSECNET H board itself  is conducted      1  Optical fiber cables are not connected to the Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD   J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G and Q80BD J71LP21GE   for the optical loop system   However  be careful that no external light enters  from outside the connectors     In the case of the Q80BD J71BR11  for the coaxial bus system   do not connect  terminal resistors to the two Type F connectors
37.  Microsoft   Windows   7 Ultimate Operating System and   Microsoft   Windows   7 Enterprise Operating System    Generic term for Microsoft   Windows   2003 R2  Standard Edition Operating System   Microsoft   Windows   2003 R2  Enterprise Edition Operating System    Microsoft   Windows   2003 R2  Standard x64 Edition Operating System    Microsoft   Windows   2003 R2  Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System    Generic term for Microsoft   Windows   2008  Standard Operating System    Microsoft   Windows   2008  Enterprise Operating System    Microsoft   Windows   2008  Standard x64 Edition Operating System    Microsoft   Windows   2008  Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System    Microsoft   Windows   2008 R2  Standard Operating System    Microsoft   Windows   2008 R2  Enterprise Operating System    Generic term of Windows Server   2003 R2 Operating System   and Windows Server   2008 Operating System    Generic term for Windows   95  Windows   98  Windows NT     Windows   2000   Windows   XP  Windows Vista     Windows   7 and Windows Server       General product name for product model names SW8D5C GPPW E  SW8D5C GPPW EA   SW8D5C GPPW EV  SW8D5C GPPW EVA    General product name for product model names SWnD5F CSKP E    n denotes the version number    General product name for product model names SWnD5C ACT E  SWnD5C ACT EA   n denotes the version number    Abbreviation for A7OBDE J71QLP23 A70BDE J7 1QLP23G E A70BDE J71QBR13 A70BDE   J71QLR23 MELSECNET 10 interface board     Windows 
38.  Parameters    The common parameters are used to set the cyclic transmission ranges of LB  LW  LX  and LY that can be sent by each station in a single network  The common parameter  settings are required only for the control station  The data of the common parameters  are sent to the normal stations when the network starts up     7 3 1 Send range for each station  LB LW settings     Assign the send ranges of the link devices  LB LW  for each station in 16 point units for  LB  start O00 0 to end OOD F  and in one point unit for LW    The following example shows send range for each station  LB LW settings  when each  of 512 points is assigned to station numbers 1 to 8      1  Setting example                                                                      1Mp1 1Ns2 1Ns3 1Ns4      Network No  1  gt      1Ns8  1Ns7  1Ns6 1Ns5  Send range  for each station 1Me1 1Ns2 1Ns3 1Ns8                        Host s                                        send range an JE  ae  Host s           1Ns2 RE send range   _____  gt     Host s   1Ns3     1Ns3 eae send range  1Ns4      1Ns4      1Ns4  1Ns5        1N5 fe    4Ns5  1Ns6       1Ns6       1Ns6  1Ns7   an7      1N7       1Ns8   L EREK     TE n       Host s  send range    1Ns8 1Ns8                               7 PARAMETER SETTIN      MELSEC        2  Screen settings  Common parameter setting screen   Perform the setting of each station s transmission range  LB LW settings  in the   Common parameter setting  screen in the MNETH utility   
39.  Power Options settings are changed by MELSECPowerManager        r      MELSEC Interface Board       5   For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board  the power options of      e  Windows were changed as follows      Invalidating the sleep settings    Changing the settings of power button action in    shutdown              Appendix 11 1 Installing MELSECPowerManager    MELSECPowerManager is installed automatically when the software package is installed to  a personal computer  The operation starts after the personal computer is restarted     Appendix 11 2 Uninstalling MELSECPowerManager    MELSECPowerManager is uninstalled automatically when the software package is  uninstalled    However  it is not uninstalled when another software package of MELSEC interface board is  installed to the personal computer    Uninstall all software driver packages for MELSEC interface board installed on the personal  computer to uninstall MELSECPowerManager     App   29 App   29    APPENDIX       MELSEC    Appendix 11 3 Checking MELSECPowerManager    The following explains how to check the installation and operating status of  MELSECPowerManager   The following is a setting example when using Windows   7      BI  gt  Control Panel          z 1  Select  Start     Control Panel       System and  ss ae Security      User Accounts and Family Safety      Set up parental controls for any user       Adjust your computer s settings                 System and Security  Review your computer s status  Back up
40.  Re 3Mp1 5  a a  1Ns3 Network No 3  Normal m  station Li Li   gt   gt   2 QCPU  QJ71 Q80BD  g QCPU  QJ71  2 BR11 J71BR11 2 BR11  g Personal g  n computer     3Ns2 3Ns3 3Ns4  Normal station Normal station Normal station    2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION       2 3 2 Setting items    MELSEC    Setting items in the case that the MELSECNET H board is used as a control station or  normal station in a multiple network system are explained below   MELSECNETH H board settings are performed by the MNETH Utility     Channel seting _  Aa f A f Secon 92 2  Network No  r n o        av O a ae    Station no    O   O f Section 9 2 3  C sen     Mode Zey   re a a T semez    Parameter Section 9 2 5  a AT DT oY              Supplementary setting   A    x      Opposite party setting Section 9 2 10  mea TT station No      Driver   Driver setting   r   a ae Section 9 2 11       2 3 3 Usable device range    The same device range as is used for a single network system  section 2 2 4  can be  used     2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION       MELSEC    2 4 If used in a Multiple CPU System or Redundant CPU System    For cautions in the case of installing MELSECNET H in a multiple CPU system or    redundant CPU system  refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System  Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network       When accessing a multiple CPU system or Redundant CPU system  use the  MELSECNET H board and network module of the following function versions     Programmable controller  MELSECNETIH board  side network module    
41.  User Account Control        windows needs your permission to continue    Do you want to allow the following program to make       changes to this computer        If you started this action  continue     a Microsoft Management Console    a Program name  Microsoft Manaqement Console  Microsoft Windows    Verified publisher  Microsoft Windows       Show detaits ERT  Lae    User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer           Details    ange when these notifications appear          5  Select  Local Policies      6  Select  Security Options      App   16    APPENDIX          File Action View Help    d4 JE          Account Policies  4 T   Local Policies     Audit Policy     User Rights Assigr     Security Options  5  Windows Firewall wit  Public Key Policies  F Software Restriction F    amp  P Security Policies or      From preceding page   4     gt  EJ l     E mm       Security Settings Policy    Network security  LDAP client signing requirements  Network security  Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based  including secure RPC  clients  Network security  Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based  including secure RPC  servers  Recovery console  Allow automatic administrative logon   Recovery console  Allow floppy copy and access to all drives and all folders   Shutdown  Allow system to be shut down without having to log on   Shutdown  Clear virtual memory pagefile   System cryptography  Force strong key protection for user keys stored on the comput
42.  User Account Control  Behavior of the elevation prompt for ad    Sammie                    Local Securty Setting   Explain       User Account Control  Behavior of the elevation prompt for     administrators in Admin Approval Mode             Prompt for credentials    Prompt for consert                                if      a        Setting completion     MELSEC    7  Select  User Account Control  Behavior of the  elevation prompt for administrators in Admin  Approval Mode Prompt for consent      8  Select  Elevate without prompting  on the  lt  lt Local  Security Setting gt  gt  tab  and click the   OK   button                 App   17    APPENDIX MELSEC       Appendix 6 Combinations of Boards with Existing Software    This section describes the combinations of boards with existing software      1  When using the MELSECNET H board and other interface boards  in the same PC   a  32 bit version operating system  1  For Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25   Q80BD J71BR11  Q80BD J71LP21G   Q80BD J71LP21GE    Supported OS    Board model name Software package name   Win   Win Win Win   Server Server  NT 4 0 Vista Win 7  95 98 2000 XP 2003 2008   A70BDE J71QLP23   SWOIVDWT MNET10P aa  CT  A7OBDE J71QLP23GE   SW2DNF MNET10    MNET10  ATOBDE J71QBR13 SW3DNF MNET10  ATOBDE J71QLR23     SW3DNF MNET10   J  Os   SW3DNF CCLINK      ___    A80BDE J61BT11  SW4DNF CCLINK B  a0     SWODNF CCLINK   x   o     a   SW1DNF CCLINK    E ZE  A80BDE J61BT13 SWZDNF CCLINK   SW3DNF CCLINK    SWODNF ANU
43.  a  board Not response  message     PC manufacturer  PC name model    OS name  Windows   XP Professional  Windows   2000  Professional  or other    Loading slot position   Use of optional boards made by other companies   If other companies  optional boards are used  provide us with the  following information      Board model name and board manufacturer     Memory address  head address and occupied size   I O address  head    address and occupied size  IRQ number  DMA number    Whether or not the problem was checked with other PCs    14 25    14 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC       MEMO    14 26 14 26    APPENDIX       MELSEC    APPENDIX  Appendix 1 Channel No  Assignment Method    This section explains the method for assigning a channel No  in the MELSECNET H  board      1  The number of boards that can be installed in one personal computer is 4  boards  Total number of both MELSECNET 10 boards and MELSECNET H    boards       2  Set the channel No  in the MELSECNET H boards and MELSECNET 10  boards so that they do not overlap         1  If only the MELSECNET H board is installed in a personal  computer   a  Automatic assignment of channel No   The channel No  is automatically assign to MELSECNET H boards installed  in a personal computer in the order of the PCI slot No   from 51 to 54     Check your personal computer s manual concerning the order of the PCI  slot numbers     App      b  User specified assignment method  In user specified assignment  the user changes the channel No  i
44.  and operate the error viewer     9 4 1 Screen description       The following explains the error viewer screen     p Communication Support Software Tool Error viewer  driver   Log View Help       Type Date and Time Time Source Error No  Massage Contents     99 07 16 22 25 42 MCCLINK1 1281 Initialize error  x 99 07 16 22 23 27 MCCLINK1 1281 Initialize error       The error types are indicated by the symbols shown below    e   Normal message  Indicates messages generated in normal  processing     A   Warning message  Messages generated to call attention even  though it is not an error      x    Error message  Indicates the details of errors generated in    each module  Double click the line showing  this symbol to see a detailed message  then    promptly correct the cause of the error      TILITY OPERATION  _ 2 2 MELSEC       9 4 2 Log menu    The following explains the contents of log menu       Log View Help  v Driver  Basic Middle Ware  Applied Middle Ware  Others    Open the Selected File      Save with a Name          Delete       Log Setting       Exit    Selecting error entry Select the error entry source type to be displayed in the error  source type viewer    The currently selected items are checked      Driver   Displays messages generated by drivers  such as common memory device    e Basic Middle Ware   Displays messages generated by the  common memory data server and tag  control process      Applied Middle Ware   Displays messages generated by MX  Chart and MX Mon
45.  become injured by the components that are installed  or surrounding materials    e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body   etc   before touching the board    Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the board        e When installing the board  take care not to contact with other boards      Wiring Instructions     ZA WARNING    e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before  performing work such as installing the board and wiring   If all power is not turned off  there is a risk of electric shock or damage to the product    e When turning on the power and operating the module after having installed the board and doing  the wiring  always attach the cover for the device module in which the board is installed   There is a risk of electric shock if the module cover is not attached     ZA CAUTION    e Properly solder the parts of a soldering type coaxial cable connector  Incomplete soldering may  result in malfunction    e Crimp the parts of a crimping type coaxial cable connector with proper force at a proper position   Failure to do so may cause drop of the cable or malfunction    e For the communication cable  specialized skills and tools are required to connect the plug and  cable  The connector plug itself is a custom part    When purchasing  consult your local Mitsubishi representative   If the connection is incomplete  this can result in a short  fire or malfun
46.  board  check the parameter settings with the     Board information setting    screen     Appendix 3 Cautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System    This section explains the cautions for accessing a Redundant CPU system using the  MELSECNETHH board     Access to Redundant CPU system     1  Redundant CPU specify  When the system  control system  standby system  System A  System B  of the  Redundant CPU is specified to access the Redundant CPU  the Logical Sta  No   set on the  target  screen of the MELSECNET H utility is used for access   Refer to Section 9 2 10 for the setting of the Logical Sta  No     15x    Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory 1 0 Test Target   Driver    4  gt       Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot     Se      r Logical Sta No   56 4  Set    Network No   1     Sta  No   j1      Multiple PLC specify     MELSECNET H Redundant PLC specify  j Control system Y                      No Specification             m Target Setting List    Change  Delete                               Device Monitor    App   4 App   4    APPENDIX MELSEC        2  Operation at occurrence of system switching  When system switching occurs during access to the Redundant CPU  access to  the Redundant CPU set for the Logical Sta  No  is continued      Example  When the following Logical Sta  No 66 was specified for access  Logical Sta  No 66  Network No   1  Sta  No   1  Multiple PLC specify  No specification  Redundant PLC specify  Control system
47.  cable   SI    H PCF   Broad band H PCF    Qsl  MELSECNET 10  mode  MELSECNET H  mode   MELSECNET H    Extended mode     lt  Optical fiber  cable     Type of cable   GI     MELSECNET 10  mode    MELSECNET H  mode    MELSECNET H  Extended mode    q Optical fiber  cable     Type of cable   62 5GI        MELSECNET 10  mode    MELSECNET H  mode    MELSECNET H  Extended mode       Coaxial cable    Type of cable   3C 2V  5C 2V  5C FB    MELSECNET 10  mode          MELSECNET H    Optical loop system     QCPU  Q Mode         MELSECNET 10  Optical loop system  I QCPU  Q wete       QCPU  A Mode   QnACPU  ACPU          MELSECNET H  Optical loop system   QCPU Q Mode            MELSECNET 10  Optical loop system  QCPU  Q Mode   QCPU  A Mode   QnACPU  ACPU                MELSECNET H  Optical loop system   QCPU Q Mode            MELSECNET 10  Optical loop system    QCPU  Q Mode   QCPU  A Mode   QnACPU  ACPU          MELSECNET H  Coaxial bus system   QCPU QMode            MELSECNET 10  Coaxial bus system  QCPU  Q Mode   QCPU  A Mode   QnACPU  ACPU          2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  MELSEC        1  When using the MELSECNET H Extended mode   a  Use the MELSECNET H board of ROM version 2X or later and SWODNC   MNETH B version 11M or later    b  When assigning 2000 bytes or more to the number of link points sent by a  station  set all stations including control stations and normal stations to the  2 MELSECNET H Extended mode     2  When using the Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Use the SWODNC MNETH B version 1
48.  displays    the following dialog box  and enables the user to change the channel No  of the  MELSECNETHH board installed in the personal computer   1     MELSECNET H Channel No  Setting      Channel No  Setting     Channel No   Current Setting  Value Value     fai 51 Ji  2  52 52 E  3 fea  sa     4  oa 54 F          Cancel   Help         PET YER Value Displays the current channel No     Setting Value   Value Changes the channel No   Setting range  51 to 54     1  Before changing channel No   exit Device Monitor Utility and all of user  programs that are using the MELSEC data link library     9 UTILITY OPERATIONS       9 2 3 Board information screen operation    MELSEC    The Board information screen is used to set and display various information about the  installed MELSECNET H board     4 MELSECNET H utility    Board list Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory 1 0 Test   Target _4          Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot             5  xj    r Own Station Information Routing Param  Setting    Network No  Group No  Sta No  Control   Normal Sta   f      an j   a zone Ste  E Routing Param  Transfer    LED  MNET H optical fiber  Board Set    RUN       z      a Asa Mode Common Param  Setting    SWE z B DN Onlinefauto  reconnection      MSE  OB      Common Param Transfer  PRM E  OG Transmission Speed  CRC OO CRC 10Mbps    n Egge Ji are  r a BERN B    fete       R   UNDER       UNDER  R    MNET H mode    LOOP    O LOOP  SD     SD Reconnec
49.  e Insert the wired external power supply cable into the external power supply cable  connector until a click is heard  Imperfect insertion may cause failure or  malfunction    e Keep the external power supply cable away from the main circuit cable  power  cables and or load cables connected to other than programmable controllers   Ensure a distance of 100mm between them  Failure to do so may result in  malfunction due to noise  surge or induction        6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION       6 4 1 Optical loop system    MELSEC    The precautions for connecting the optical fiber cable with Q80BD J71LP21 25   Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G and Q80BD   J71LP21GE in an optical loop system are given below      1  Precautions for connecting     a     The types of optical fiber cables that can be used vary depending on the  distance between stations       Distance between stations  m       Type    SI type optical fiber cable   Old type  A 2P L      Q80BD J71LP21 25   Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21G   Q80BD J71LP21GE  Q80BD J71LP21S 25 10Mbps  fixed  10Mbps  fixed     500  1640 5 ft   200  656 2 ft            300  984 3 ft   100  328 1 ft         SI optical fiber cable    500  1640 5 ft   200  656 2 ft   Nen  ot allowe        H PCF optical fiber cable    1000  3281 ft   400  1312 4 ft   Not allowed       Broad band H PCF optical fiber cable    1000  3281 ft   1000  3281 ft         QSI optical fiber cable    1000  3281 ft   1000  3281 ft    
50.  field      The sixth digit  from the left  of the serial No  is 7 or higher                             Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE   The sixth digit  from the left  of the serial No  is 4 or higher   ak ak k ak ak  4   2 kek kok  gt k  gt K K K    The serial No  of the board can be verified at the part shown  in the illustration           6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       6 4 Cable Connection  This section explains precautions when connecting cables to MELSECNET H board      1  Precautions on general wiring      WARNING e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system  before performing work such as installing the board and wiring   If all power is not turned off  there is a risk of electric shock or damage to the    product    e When turning on the power and operating the module after having installed the  board and doing the wiring  always attach the cover for the device module in which  the board is installed     There is a risk of electric shock if the module cover is not attached       CAUTION e When removing the cable from the board  do not pull the cable   Pulling the cable that is still connected to the board may cause damage to the board  or cable  or malfunction due to bad cable contacts   e Prevent foreign matter such as chips or wiring debris from getting on the board   Failure to do so can result in fire  breakdowns or malfunction         2  Precautions on communication cable wiring    A CAUT
51.  for versions indicated in the parentheses or later     App   21    App   21    APPENDIX  MELSEC       x1   Software can be installed in the same PC  however  the PC cannot access to the MELSECNET H board   or to other stations via the MELSECNET H board     2   Update the version of each software if it is used with the MELSECNET H board on the same PC   For details on version update products  contact your nearest Mitsubishi dealer     3   There may be some restrictions on the use of the MELSECNET H board in each package     App   22 App   22    APPENDIX MELSEC       2  For Q81BD J71LP21 25    Supported OS  Software package  Software name          Server i Server    name Win 2000 Win XP Vista Win 7  2003 2008    SW1D5F CSKP E    Communication  Support Software  Wan    SWOD5C ACT E  SW2D5C ACT E    O  SWOD5F GPPW E   SWOD5C GPPW E  SW1D5F GPPW E   SW1D5C GPPW E    SW2D5C GPPW E  SW3D5C GPPW E    SW4D5C GPPW E    x  A A  A A       SW5D5C GPPW E    SW6D5C GPPW E  swrsc cppw    O   ____h U    A A    A A  GT Designer2 SW2D5C GTD2 E a  2 72A     2 103H     Win 2000   Windows  2000Professional Win XP  Windows  XP Professional Server 2003  Windows Server  2003 R2  Vista   Windows Vista   Server 2008   Windows Server   2008 Win 7   Windows   7       Can be operated simultaneously  x   Cannot be operated simultaneously        A   Operable simultaneously for versions indicated in the parentheses or later   x1   There may be some restrictions on the use of the MELSECNET H board in each pa
52.  for versions indicated in the parentheses or later   x   Cannot be operated simultaneously     App   20 App   20    APPENDIX       Software name    Communication Support  Software Tool  2    GX Developer    MELSEC     2  When using the MELSECNET H board  Communication Support  Software Tool  GX Developer and GT Designer2 in the same PC   a  32 bit version operating system  1  For Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q8OBD J71LP21S 25   Q80BD J71BR11  Q80BD J71LP21G   Q80BD J71LP21GE    Supported OS    Software package i    j i Win Win   Server i Server     name Win 95   Win 98   NT 4 0 Vista Win 7  2000 XP 2003 2008    SW2D5F XMOP E    SW3D5F CSKP E  SW3D5F OLEX E x  SW3D5F XMOP E   x  1 x    SWOD5C ACT E    SW2D5C ACT E a    A A  SW3D5C ACT E  3 09K   3 14Q    O x x     x x A x A  SW1D5C SHEET E  1 08J   1 10L   SWOD5F GPPW E  al   x   x  SWOD5C GPPW E  SW1D5F GPPW E      4 s Sk    SW1D5C GPPW E  SW2D5F GPPW E  1 A      x   x   x  SW2D5C GPPW E  30D   SW3D5F GPPW E  Sek z  SW3D5C GPPW E  SW4D5C GPPW E  SW5D5C GPPW E    swepsc eppwe      Z do o oo  gt     OE  SW7D5C GPPW E    ee EEE NERE TERES  A A          A A       Win 95   Windows   95 Win 98   Windows   98 NT 4 0   Windows NT   Workstation 4 0  Win 2000   Windows   2000Professional Win XP  Windows   XP Professional Server 2003  Windows Server   2003 R2  Vista   Windows Vista   Server 2008   Windows Server   2008 Win 7   Windows   7        Can be operated simultaneously  x   Cannot be operated simultaneously     ZA   Operable simultaneously
53.  ha   a XUR   K   n  ne Gu 3  4  3 4 Coaxial Cable Specification                 ii  iidk kk kk kk kek Eke Ek   Ek   KAK KRA KK KK KA KA KA KAK KK A KK 3  4    A 11 A 11    4 FUNCTION 4  1to4  4    ACV FUNCUOM       3   SNN PA    PAR PEN NEN Da eet N ND a a EA a    KE a A a   4  1  4 2 Specifications of the Link Data Sending Receiving Processing Time                iiiiee  4  2  4 2 1 Link data sending receiving processing            eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeatentesas 4  2   5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5  1to 5  6  5 1 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive 0 0 0    ec ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeeesaeeaeeeas 5  1  511  EMC  Directive related  Standards    xi  pistes cl dwaya dad ad lawana wanin ya W   a k  lin enka Baga ad lace 5  2  5 1 2 Installation in a control panel                  i kek kak   keke     k  k   k  k a kk ka kK KRA KAK KA AA 5  3  AMES IC aDISS  sya KA AN GAYA ot ANT cs An a bee Ki L  KE ee nee ee a oe n sel oe Se Shoe Ne 5  4  DAA FORMS CONC xa x3 Pa sae ie ae KE da 2E ke KU SE AKAN wh Pe ase ad sua ee ee ate woe atta alas hee ER   TA KE Den es ees 5  5  5 1 5 Noise filter  power supply line filter     ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeseesaeesieesieeneesieesaeee 5  5  5 2 Requirements for Conformance to Low Voltage Directive   0       ceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeseeeaeeeaeenas 5  6  6 1 Procedure Up to the Point of Operation                cccccec
54.  inch         App   27 App   27    APPENDIX MELSEC       Appendix 10 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode   Standby  Hibernate  Sleep     MELSECNET H board does not support the power save mode  standby  hibernate  sleep    The following explains the behavior of the board and the personal computer when the  personal computer enters the power save mode  standby  hibernate  sleep  under the  specific operating system     Appendix 10 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode   standby    When using Windows   NT  Windows   2000  Windows Server   2003  and  Windows   XP     When the personal computer enters the power save mode  standby   the following message  appears and the power save mode  standby  is disabled   The MELSECNET H board continues its operation and the data link remains normal     System Standby Failed    N The device driver for the  PCI MELSECNET H Cor  troller  device is preventing the machine  e    from entering standby  Please close all applications and try again  If the problem  persists  you may need to update this driver        For the corrective action for when the personal computer is set to enter the power save  mode  standby   refer to Section 14 2     Appendix 10 2 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode   hibernate  sleep    When using Windows Vista     Windows Server   2008  and Windows   7     The following explains the behavior of the board when the power save mode  hibernate    sleep  i
55.  number for LW and LSW     Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG   Device No  Set a head address of a device number whose value is to be  changed    HEX  Hexadecimal  DEC  Decimal  OCT  Octal      Setting Data Enter a value to be continuously changed    HEX  Hexadecimal  DEC  Decimal        Points Set the number of points to perform continuos change of values    HEX  Hexadecimal  DEC  Decimal  OCT  Octal     e Configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the entire system  works safely at all times for data change control to the programmable controller in  operation    Also  determine corrective actions for an event of data communication error  between the PC and programmable controller CPU in use        TILITY OPERATION  ie 2 2 MELSEC       9 3 8 Tuning on off a bit device  Turns on off the specified bit device      1  Selecting the menu  Select  Device write     Bit device set  reset   from the menu bar      2  Dialog box    xi  Device Type  Device Type  i  direct link input  z    Network No  1    DeviceNo       HEX C DEC C OCT  0000    omen        Enter a network number for LX  LY  LB and LSB   e a number of a device whose value is to be changed    HEX  Hexadecimal  DEC  Decimal  OCT  Octal      NWARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the entire system  works safely at all times for data change control to the programmable controller in  operation    Also  determine corrective actions for an ev
56.  of 32 groups    By setting a group designation to the target station number in the control data of a  dedicated instruction  stations with the matching group number retrieve the transient  data    Note that whether or not the transient transmission is normally completed cannot be  verified because the data are transmitted to multiple stations      1  Visual representation of the function  The following figure shows an example of grouping  When a transient  transmission is executed by designating group No  1  all of the three stations   1Ns3  1Ns5 and 1Ns6  retrieve the transient data   Group No  1    1Mp1 1Ns2       ______                  Group No  1 Group No  1     2  Setting method  Set the group number of the MELSECNET H board using the  Board information   screen of the MNETH utility   Setting range   1 to 32  Default   0  no group designation         iS MELSECNET 7H utility    Board list Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor    r Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot        Own Station Information  Network No  Group No Sta No  Control   Normal Sta     j      W  i a  Control Sta  x     Set the desired group number                  3  Transient transmission instructions that allows group designation  Use mdSend to execute the transient transmission instruction in the user  program     A CAUTION  Precautions when executing the transient transmission by a group function   When a group is designated  the execution of the transient transmission c
57.  of the control tools    14 10 14 10    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       14 4 2 Flowchart to use when SD RD LED does not turn on    The board information screen of MNETH utility displays SD and RD LED status  This  function is the same as the MELSECNET H board s LED messages              An error occurs     Is the L ERR LED lit     Go to Section 14 4 3                    Is the  control station  parameter  OK         Check the control station  parameter                 Does the   RD  LED remain  unlit     Does the   SD  LED remain  unlit     YES NO                           Normal      Turn on off the B  X and Y  assigned to the host via  PC     Turn on off the B  X and Y  used by PC at other  stations         Monitor B  X and Y via PC         Monitor B  X and Y at  other stations                Does the B   X and Y turn on off at  other stations     Does the B   X and Y turn on off  at PC     NO NO    Replace the PC MELSECNET   H board     Are the  monitor condition  and user program  normal                          NO YES                     Check the monitor  condition or user program     Replace the MELSECNET H  board since the  SD  and        RD  LEDs are broken           Did the SD RD  turn on     Consult with the dealer  regarding the problem           Complete    14 11 14 11    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       14 4 3 Flowchart to use when L ERR  LED turns on          An error occurs        YES  Has the MNETH utility standard        Stop the user 
58.  r Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot          Own Station Information      Network No Group No  Sta No  Control   Normal Sta     ja fo fl  Control Sta     r  Each Station Status    0   HE                       Transfer Loop Transfer  T Status Status Status cerr St canen a R peered  Invalid Sta  Invalid Sta  Normal Sta     lena Saan EEE E          Device Monitor      Sets the channel  MELSECNET H board  perform each station status   Own Station Information Displays the host information     Displays the communication status and loop status for every link station that is set using  parameters      Red     Transfer Status Invalid Sta  Indicates a baton pass status error         Yellow  m Loop Status Invalid Sta  Indicates a forward reverse loopstatus error     Transfer Status Normal Sta  Indicates the station in normal communication        Each Station Status  O Select Control Sta  Indicates the station that is set as the control station        Current Control Sta  Indicates the station that is actually operating  ras as the control station            Gray  T Reserve Sta  Indicates the station that is set as a reserved station   However  this is valid only when the host is executing  cyclic communication        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 2 8 Error history monitor screen operation    This screen displays the history of loop errors  communication errors  and transient  transmission errors      1  Up to 16 items are stored in the loop switch data history   When there are m
59.  soft         Ask me again later  Windows will ask again the next time you plug in your device or log on        Don t show this message again for this device  Your device will not function until you install driver software       Cancel        End     8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE       MELSEC     e  Using Windows   7           dj Device Manager                File Action View Help           E3  El   E sa          t   Rs  4  l    Other devices    fy Network Controller             Update Driver Software     Disable       Uninstall    Scan for hardware changes    Properties                  gt   L Update Driver Software   Network Controller       How do you want to search for driver software      gt  Search automatically for updated driver software  Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software  for your device  unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation  settings     gt  Browse my computer for driver software    Locate and install driver software manually       Cancel                      L Update Driver Software   Network Controller    Browse for driver software on your computer       v   A Browsen     V  Include subfolders         Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer  This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device  and all driver  software in the same category as the device      Net   cance                  End     1  Open the Windows   Device Manager sc
60.  station that  executed the instruction  to the relay station that performs the routing  In the  following example  it is the time required for the data to be transmitted from  station 1Mp1 to station 1Ns3   Refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual   PLC to PLC network   for the calculation of translation of delay time      b  Processing time from relay station to request destination  This is the transmission delay time from the relay station to the request  destination  the station accessed with the instruction   In the following example   it is the time required for the data to be transmitted from station 2MP1 to station  2Ns3   Refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual   PLC to PLC network   for the calculation of translation of delay time                                i y    1Mp1   2Ns2    2Ns3        1V2                READ READ    request  source    request  destination       READ execution READ completion  PC processing time f eters    of request source N pe  Link scan on request j       source side F  Link scan on request j y     destination side i F l  Sequence scan of   y    request destination side    When three or more networks are relayed through by means of routing  add the  processing time from one relay station to the other relay station to the routing  transmission delay time        12 18 12 18    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC        5  Setting example  The routing parameter setting examples  A and 
61.  status      Normal m Datalink Information   F E    Transmission Status                      Link Scan Time  During data link    Maximum Reason for Transmission   fi 7 ms Interruption    Minimum Normal comm    j                  Reason for Transmission  Stoo    ms  Current  E   Normal comm   ms                           Device Monitor             Content    Channel Sets the channel  MELSECNET H board  perform loop monitor   Displays the host information   Displays the host s loop status using characters and graphics   Also  images are changed as shown below according to the connection status      lt For Q80BD J71LP21 25 Q81BD J71LP21 25 Q80BD J71LP21S 25 Q80BD J71LP21G  and Q80BD J71LP21GE gt         F     F  R  zc FR  r aaa SS FR                                   Forward loop   Normal Forward loop   Normal Forward loop   Abnormal  Reverse loop   Normal Reverse loop   Abnormal Reverse loop   Normal                            Data link by loop back Forward loop   Abnormal  Reverse loop   Abnormal     lt For Q80BD J71BR11 gt           Display the same regardless of the loop status        Displays current loop status        Displays the current data link status        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 2 7 Each station status screen operation    This screen displays communication status and loop status for each station     JH MELSECNETZH utility mE E    Board list   Board information   Loop monitor Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory 1 0 Test   Target 4    gt     
62.  system    e The language switching function of the operation system set by  Regional and  Language Options  on the Control Panel screen is not supported  The  installation or uninstallation may not work normally if the language setting is  changed    e Default settings are set to the channel numbers and the parameters at the  installation  Therefore  when a reinstallation of the software package is required   record the existing settings in advance  and reset the settings after the  reinstallation   Refer to Chapter 7    8 1 8 1       8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE       MELSEC    8 1 1 Installing utility    This section explains a procedure for installing the MELSECNET H board utility      1  Installation  1  Insert the CD ROM to the CD ROM drive   2  Double click the  Setup exe  file on the CD ROM  3  By following the on screen instructions  select or enter the necessary  information   For instructions which are difficult to determine  refer to Section 8 1 3        2  When installation is completed normally  When the installation is completed normally  the icons shown below are  registered in the Windows   Start menu    Start     Program     MELSEC  or   Start     All Programs     MELSEC       FR eve Mentor utiy  stats Device montor utiy     MELSEC Data Link Library Disol MELSEC data link lib    Reference Manual   2 3 isplays a ata link library manual      1  The error viewer is available only when Windows   95 or Windows   98 is used as OS     gt 2  ME
63.  the following setup setting on the PC    Limited to the PC includes those setup setting items      Example   BIOS Setup Utility    Plug  amp  Play O S    YES       No   Reset Configuration Data    No       YES     Then  restart the PC     14 8 14 8    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       14 4 Flowchart to Use when Data Link is not Achieved    The following describes a flowchart that must be checked when no data link is  achieved after the MELSECNET H board and Control station as well as normal  stations were connected     START    y       Check the MELSECNET H board LED                Is the  RUN YES            LED unlit  t    NO Refer to Section 14 4 1   Flowchart to  use when RUN LED is unlit      Does the  SD RD  LED YES  remain unlit  4    NO Refer to Section 14 4 2   Flowchart to  use when SD RD LED does not turn on      YES                Is the  L ERR  LED lit        Refer to Section 14 4 3   Flowchart to  use when L ERR LED turns on            Start the MNETH utility and select   8Board Information  screen                    Is  T  PASS  LED of YES Baton passing of current station normal    current station lit           END    Current station normal  Select  Each station status  screen  ne e          Can data link be achieved  for the entire system         Refer to Section 14 4 4   Flowchart to  use when unable to achieve data link  for entire system             Can data link be achieved  for a specific station         Refer to Section 14 4 5   Flowchart to  u
64.  the link devices  the programs should be interlocked        x1  The separation prevention refers to a prevention of link data with double  word precision  32 bits   such as the current value of the positioning module   from being separated into new data and old data in one word  16 bits  units  due to the cyclic transmission timing     11 4 11 4    11 PROGRAMMING       MELSEC    11 3 Link Special Relays  SB  Registers  SW     11 5    The data linking information is stored in the link special relays  SB  registers  SW    They can be used by the user program  or used for investigating faulty areas and the  causes of errors by monitoring them    The following table shows which SB and SW can be used to check which information   For more details  refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System  Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network        1  To know the information about the host    Personal computer status of the host  pu U SB004AH SW004Bu   normal abnormal  SB004B      The external power supply status of the host SB0042      Communication status between MELSECNET H SB0020     Sw00201  board and personal computer    SB0040   to 44H SW0040h to 46H  Setting status of the MELSECNET H board POELE to G   sions to 68u      Running status of the MELSECNET H board   status of the MELSECNET H board   SB0047   to 49H   to 49H   SWO0047H to 4An   to 4AH        2  To know information about the entire network  CPU and personal computer status of each station SBO0080H SW0080  to 83H   nor
65.  the station No  of the network module controlled by the multiple CPU system or  Sta  No   eee ARE  CPU e ee I    Multiple PLC specify   PLC specify  Specify a target programmable controller CPU No  in the multiple CPU system    a target programmable controller CPU No  in the multiple CPU system     Redundant PLC specify Specify a target redundant CPU in the redundant CPU system   Button Registers the setting contents in the list of external devices     Select the line to change  When this button is clicked  the data that are registered can be  Button changed   The same operation is performed when the line being changed is double  clicked      Button Select the line to be deleted  When this button is clicked  the registered logical station  No  can be deleted        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 2 11 Driver screen operation    This operation sets the combination settings between the MELSECNET H board and  MELSECNET 10 board and sets the link device access system and the time for each  type of monitoring            ixi  Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory 1 0 Test   Target  lt   gt    m Combination setting with MELSECNET 10 board     The channel is used with the MELSECNET H Set  board     The channel is used from channel 51 with the     MELSECNET 10 board detected automatically  and the channel of the remainder is used the Default Value  MELSECNET H board   The channel is used from channel 51 with the     MELSECNET 10 board of specified 1 0 p
66.  times    0 0  11 5    ao                         The fastest link scan time in the low speed cyclic transmission can be calculated by  the following equation   LSL   LS X number of stations   LS   LS X  number of stations   1   LSL   The fastest link scan time in the low speed cyclic transmission  LS   Normal link scan time        2  Fixed term cycle interval setting  The low speed cyclic data is sent in the link cycle of the designated time  frequency   Valid setting frequency  1 to 65535 s  18 h  12 min and 15 s    Setting method   1  Click     Fixed term cycle interval setting  to select   2  Set the time in seconds  the screen shows a value of 600         r Specification of low speed cyclic transmission  Transmit data of one station in 1 scan    Fixed term cycle interval setting  600 Sec        C System times                            12 7 12 7    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC        3  System timer interval  The low speed cyclic data are sent in the link cycle at the designated time   By omitting year  month  and day in the setting  the low speed cycle transmission  can be activated yearly  or monthly  or daily   Hour  minute and second values  must be entered   Setting points  1 to 8 points   Setting method   1  Click     System times  to select   2  Set year  month  day  hour  minute and second to the designated time   In the following screen example   Points 1to3   By omitting year  month and day  data is sent every  day at the designated time   Points 4 and 5   
67.  to the point of operation and the settings     When desiring to know the parameter settings for the  MELSECNET H board  Chapter 7     Chapter 7 gives the parameter settings     When desiring to know the procedure for installing and  uninstalling the software package  Chapter 8     Chapter 8 gives the procedure for installing and uninstalling the software  package     When desiring to know the operation of each utility  Chapter 9   Chapter 9 gives the operation methods for each utility      9  When desiring to know about the MELSEC data link library     Chapter 10   Chapter 10 gives overview concerning the MELSEC data link library      10  When desiring to know the interlock related signals  Chapter 11   Chapter 11 gives the interlock related signals      11  When desiring to know the application functions  Chapter 12   Chapter 12 gives the MELSECNET H board s application functions      12  When desiring to know about troubleshooting  Chapter 14   Chapter 14 gives information on troubleshooting      13  When desiring to know how to assign channel No   Appendix     The appendix gives channel No  assignment methods for the MELSECNET H  board     GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS    Unless otherwise specified  this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe  MELSECNETHH interface board     Q80BD J71LP21 25 Abbreviation for Q80BD J71LP21 25 MELSECNETI H interface board   Q80BD J71LP21S 25 Abbreviation for Q80BD J71LP21S 25 MELSECNET H interface board   Q8
68.  used  when sending data from the request source to the request destination   when sending a request   and the other is used when returning from the  request destination to the request source  when sending a response    Either one of them or both must be set for each station        1  Request source 2  Relay station 3  Relay station 4  Relay station        7  Relay station 6  Relay station 5  Relay station                8  Relay station 9  Request destination    7Ns2   8Mp1              Transfer to network   Intermediate Intermediate  1  Request source No  network No  station No     Used when sending a reques    al a              ion Used when sending a reques    Used when sending a request  Used when sending a response    2  Relay sta    3  Relay station    Se       Used when sending a reques     3  Used when sending a response    4  Relay station    Se             Used when sending a reques  Used when sending a response    Used when sending a request  Used when sending a response    5  Relay station    6  Relay station    Se          Used when sending a request  Used when sending a response    7  Relay station    Sa                      ion           gt        Used when sending a response    8  Relay sta    12 20 12 20    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC       12 3 3 Group function    The group function is used to group the target stations of a transient transmission and  send data to all of the stations in a group with a single instruction  One network may  have a maximum
69.  when the button is clicked  the data which are set can be  deleted     Setting Clear   Button Initializes the contents of all the X and Y settings registered in the  Common parameter  setting  screen        x1  For the MELSECNET H Extended mode  up to 35840 bytes can be set to number  of link points per station     TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC        3  Reserved station setting screen    MELSECNETZH Common parameter setting    B W setting   X Y setting Reserved station setting   Supplementary setting          gt  Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot  1     Sta No  Sta No  Sta No  Sta No  Sta No  Sta No  Sta No  Sta No     gaie ee 25   R 33 I    4 49  57 Ea  D   Tae FE 2 TF    34 7 42 T  50 58  3 M kinn 19 7E 3 43 7 51 59     4 M 12 T  20   ev 22 F 3r 4r 52 I7 60 T7     Gh ich  eat E 2a      TA  En 45 T7 53   61 T7   Sao Ee HIE pee E 30 r as r sr e27  Tan E Tan 23 j ra ea    HE   kal E sr 63 T     cD PE 1EJ 24 Fr zi E ali  Ez 43 TT 56 TT 54 T7          Explanation Setting Status    IV Reserved Station Specified       I    Reserved Station Not Specified          Check Loox   Cancel   Help      Selects the channel  MELSECNET H board  performing the settings     Sta  N This sets reserve stations   a Uyo  If a check mark is placed in the check box  that station is set as a reserve station        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC        4  Supplementary setting screen       MELSECNET H Common parameter setting    B W setting   X Y setting   Reserved station setting Supplementary setting
70.  your computer   Find and fix problems       enore ana Trene  Connect to thelnternet    Appearance and Personalization  Ry Change the theme    Change desktop background          View network status and tasks Adjust screen resolution  Choose homegroup and sharing options a  G  N Clock  Language  and Region  J Hardware and Sound TW change keyboor   lt  View devices and printers       BZ Programs     R   g    Uninstall a program       WEZZAWEIKZZEETEZTETE IO  EE P 2  Select  Administrative Tools      Control Panel Home                               pr Action Center     anasa Review your computer s status and resoh Change User Account Control settings  Troubleshoot commen computer probk your computer to an carier time  Network and   ntemet  Hardware and Sound    Windows Firewall  Check firewall status   Allow a program through Windows Firewall  Programs  User Accounts and Farnih yystem  es U OE rn antara recesoriped_  Check n  E an   Allcw remete access   See the name of this computer     Device Manager    Personalization Ep Windows Update    Clock  Language  and Regon Q Turn automatic updating on or off   Check for updates   View installed updates    Ease of Access       P Power Options    Change when the computer sleeps       Ma Backup and e         Back up your computer   Restore files from backup  BitLocker Drive Encryption  Pi nputer by encrypting data on your disk   Manage BitLocker         E dive  Create and format hard dsk portions          l     lt j   Control Panel    S
71. 0BD J71LP21G Abbreviation for Q80BD J71LP21G MELSECNET H interface board   Q80BD J71LP21GE Abbreviation for Q80BD J71LP21GE MELSECNETHH interface board   Q80BD J71BR11 Abbreviation for Q80BD J71BR11 MELSECNET H interface board   Q81BD J71LP21 25 Abbreviation for Q81BD J71LP21 25 MELSECNETI H interface board     Generic term for Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD   J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE  Q80BD J71BR11                       MELSECNET H board       MNETH utility Abbreviation for MELSECNET H utility  Personal computer PC AT compatible computer  Windows   95 Abbreviation for Microsoft   Windows   95 Operating System              Generic term for Microsoft   Windows   98 Operating System and   Microsoft   Windows   98 Second Edition Operating System    Windows NT   Abbreviation for Microsoft   Windows NT   Workstation 4 0 Operating System   Windows   2000 Abbreviation for Microsoft   Windows   2000 Operating System    Windows   XP Abbreviation for Microsoft   Windows   XP Professional Operating System    Generic term of Microsoft   Windows Vista   Home Basic Operating System   Microsoft   Windows Vista   Home Premium Operating System    Windows Vista   Microsoft   Windows Vista   Business Operating System    Microsoft   Windows Vista   Ultimate Operating System and   Microsoft   Windows Vista   Enterprise Operating System    Generic term for Microsoft   Windows   7 Home Premium Operating System   Microsoft   Windows   7 Professional Operating System   
72. 1 MELSECNET H  1 slot        Data Setting  Send Range Setting for Each Station    Total Station  4 StaNo    1 Pairing  No Pai z     Low Speed  Monitoring   SendRangefor LB  0000     foorF   ip  2000      20FF  Urano Eas ir Lwfoooo      p  rr   awf2ooo    20rF             Send Range for Each Station                StaNo   LB  ew   1 O000 lt   00FF 0000   gt 00FF   2000 lt   gt 20FF   2000 lt   gt 20FF   2 0100 lt    01FF 0100 lt   gt 01FF   2100 lt    21FF   2100 lt   21FF   a 0100 lt   gt 01FF 0100   gt 01FF  2100 lt    21FF 2100 lt   gt 21FF Delete    4 0200 lt   gt 02FF _ 0200 lt    02FF   2200 lt    22FF   2200 lt    22FF          Setting Clear                           The sending to other stations can be activated by three methods  1    Transmit data of  one station in 1 scan   2    Fixed term cycle interval setting   and 3    System times   and those three method are set in the  Common parameter setting  screen  bus  setting     Only one of them can be selected     MELSECNET H Common parameter setting       B W setting   XY setting   Reserved station setting Supplementary setting      r  Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot             Constant Scan ms          r Specification of low speed cyclic transmission                           Maximum No of Lagi to e   Station     Transmit data of one station in 1 scan        ___ 1   system stations in 1 scan      Fixed term cycle interval setting Sec  J    2   T With multiplex transmission aa es EE      There is a data link through 
73. 14 4 2  Section 14 4 4  Section 14 4 5   Section 14 5 1  Section 14 5 2  Section 14 5 3  Section 14 5 4     Section 14 6  Appendix 2  Appendix 5 1 Appendix 6  Appendix 7   Appendix 8   Chapter 11 to 15 changed to Chapter 10 to 14   Section 2 6 changed to Appendix 7 and 8   Appendix 7 changed to Appendix 9    Chapter 10  Section 11 3 to 11 9    Feb   2012   SH NA  080128 X Ir Addition  Appendix 10  Appendix 11    Section 2 5  Section 8 1 1  Section 8 1 3  Section 8 2    Dec   2012   SH NA  080128 Y  SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS   Section 2 1  Section 2 4  Section 2 5  Section 3 1  Section 3 2   Section 6 4 2  Section 6 4 3  Section 8 1 2  Section 9 2 10    Japanese Manual Version SH 080129 Y  This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind  nor does it confer any patent          licenses  Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property  rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual        2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION       PRECAUTIONS FOR USE    _     1      2      3      4      5      6     Transfer function between loops and routing transfers    The MELSECNET H board cannot be used as a relay station for the transfer  function between data links and during routing transfers     If the transfer function between data links and routing transfers are used  use  the network module as a relay station     Remote I O Network  The 
74. 1Ns4    gt  Reverse loop  Loopback                The multiplex transmission function is effective only in reducing the link scan time  when the number of connected stations is 16 or more and the link devices assigned  with common parameters is 2 048 bytes or more  The link scan time will be 1 1 to  1 3 times faster compared to when the multiplex transmission function is not used     12 25    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC       MEMO    12 26 12 26    13 ERROR CODE  j 2 MELSEC       13 ERROR CODE    For details of error codes displayed on the error messages of the utility  refer to the  following manual   e MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual    For details of error codes displayed on the Error history monitor screen  Section 9 2 8   of the utility  refer to the following manual   e Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual   PLC to PLC network     For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual       13 1 13 1    13 ERROR CODE MELSEC       MEMO    14 TROUBLESHOOTING  MELSEC       14 TROUBLESHOOTING    This chapter describes how to determine the cause of trouble that may occur during  system construction as well as appropriate corrective actions     14 1 When Performing Troubleshooting    Ideally occurrence of trouble should be kept to a minimum in order to startup the  system effectively  However  once an error occurs  it is important that we identify the  cause as quickly as possible    The following are the three basic points that must b
75. 286  11Ex  Failed to allocate the Memory Area  Increase the memory     287  11F  Link Parameter is nothing or has abnormal data  Sel the parameter wil   MELSECNET F utility   and reset the board     Remove another option board   Take actions for the WDT error   Refer to Section  14 7      A WDT error occurred on the MELSECNET H board driver  side     295  127  The Board WDT error had occurred   296  128  The CLOCK STOP error had occurred    Replace the MELSECNET H board   297  129  The Target Abort error had occurred on the PCI bus     304  1304  The Data Parity error had occurred on the PCI bus     288  120        Change the setting of Power Options to prevent  305  131  Shift to the sleep or the hibernate was detected  the system from transitioning to sleep or  hibernate     33027  8103s  The driver is not yet started  or an error occurred while Correct the cause of the driver error  then restart     opening the driver  the PC     An error occurred while resetting the MELSECNET H board    One of the following two conditions is suspected as the cause    1  The common memory area used by the MELSECNET H  board may be in contention with other device    2  No response was received from the MELSECNET H  board     1  Check for overlapping setting with other  optional board    2  Perform memory and I O diagnosis using the  MNETH utility  If the error persists  replace the  MELSECNETHH board     33029  8105n          1  If an event error occurs in event viewer or error viewer  make
76. 2N or later     3  When using the Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25 or Q80BD   J71LP21S 25 at a communication speed of 25Mbps  errors may occur at all  stations if multiple boards with the same network number are installed  or the  operating systems are started up shut down or the boards are reset  simultaneously on the adjacent personal computers  In this case  set the  communication speed to 10Mbps        2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  MELSEC       2 2 Single Network System    A single network system is one system that connects the control station and the normal  stations with an optical fiber cable or a coaxial cable     2 2 1 Optical loop system    In the optical loop system  1 control station and 63 normal stations  a total of 64  stations  can be connected  Any station number can be assigned as the control station   However  only one station can be set as the control station per system    In the following sample system  station number 1 has been assigned as the control    station     Station No  1 Station No  2 Station No  64   control station   normal station   normal station           Personal    comp  ter QCPU   QJ71    QCPU  QJ71       Q80BD   U71LP21 25    an    Power supply          a  2   gt   n  re         5  A                                  Optical fiber cable    2 2 2 Coaxial bus system    In the coaxial bus system  1 control station and 31 normal stations  a total of 32  stations  can be connected  As in the optical loop system  any station number can be  assigne
77. 6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       6 5 Standalone Check of the MELSECNET H Board  Offline Tests     Before executing the data link operation  check the MELSECNET H board and the  cables    Select a test item using the mode setting switch on the  Board information  screen in  the MNETH Utility    The following three test are available for the offline tests      1  Self loopback test  This test checks the hardware of the internal circuits  including the send receive  circuit of the MELSECNET H board  as well as the cables      2  Internal self loopback test  This test checks the hardware of the internal circuits  including the send receive  circuit of the MELSECNET H board      3  Hardware test  This test checks the hardware inside the MELSECNET H board     Flow of offline tests    C Test start D          Self loopback test             Test completed   Internal self loopback test     lt C Te  i resa   gt     OK               H W test                      Defective send receive  circuit   Corrective action   Replace module          Defective internal circuit  Corrective action   Replace module    Defective cable  Corrective action   Replace cable             The data link operation cannot be executed normally if at least one station is placed  in the test mode  offline  during data linking  online      6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       6 5 1 Self loopback test    In this section  a check of the hardware  includin
78. ALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE    The methods for installing and uninstalling the software package are explained     8 1 Installation    This section explains a procedure for installing the software package      1  Overview of installation procedure  The following flowchart shows the installation procedure     CT TT    y    Install utility     Refer to section 8 1 1                Y    Power OFF the personal computer           y  Install the MELSECNET H board to the personal computer           y    Power ON the personal computer           y    Install driver      Refer to section 8 1 2    Ce      1  When using Windows NT  the driver is installed at the same time as the utility installation                          2  Installation precautions  The following are the precautions when installing the software package    e Log on as a user having administrator authority    e Make sure to close other applications running on Windows    including resident  software such as antivirus software  before installation    e The installer may not work normally because the update program of operating  system or other companies  software such as Windows   Update and Java  update may start automatically  Please install the driver after changing the  setting of the update program not to start automatically    e Check if the display settings on the  Device Manager  or other relevant  functions are correct  and install an appropriate display driver    Or update the Windows   operating
79. Access to multiple j        All versions available Function version B or later  CPU system  Access to Redundant j      1 j j  Function version D or later   Function version D or later  CPU system      1  When using a MELSECNET H board of function version D or earlier   access to a redundant CPU is not performed normally        2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  MELSEC       2 5 Operating Environment    The following table shows the operating environment for the MELSECNET H board   For details on the personal computer and operating system  refer to the  instructions on the following pages     Windows     Windows    supported personal computer personal computer    Required memory System requirements of the operating system must be met     Personal   pCI bus For Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G  and Q80BD     computer   specifications    J71BR11  e Compliant with PCI standard Rev 2 2  5V DC  32 bit bus  Basic clock   33MHz   For Q81BD J71LP21 25  e Compliant with PCI Express   standard Rev 1 0a  3 3 V DC  Link width   1lane  Basic  clock   100MHz   Microsoft   Windows   95 Operating System  Microsoft   Windows   98 Operating System  Microsoft   Windows   98 Second Edition Operating System  Microsoft   Windows NT   Workstation Operating System Version 4 0  Service Pack3 or  higher  Microsoft   Windows   2000 Professional Operating System  Microsoft   Windows   XP Professional Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Server   2003 R2  Standard Edition Operating System  Micros
80. B  are explained using the  system configuration explained in Section 12 3 2     2  Relay station 3  Relay station 4  Relay station       QCPU   1Mp1      I I I  C Network No  1 DC Network No  2 YC Network No  3   d Network is    QCPU  1Ns2   2Mp1 QCPU  2Ns2   3Ns3 QCPU  3Ns2   4Mp1                                                                                                                                                        5  Relay station  pc    1Ns3   la cpu  1Ns4     QCPU   2Ns3 QCPU   3M  1  QCPUJ  4Ns2   5Mp1  1  Request source  Network No  5     Network No  6          7  Relay station    Network No  7    r    Lt    9  Request destination 8  Relay station    Network No  9 Network No     QCPU  9Ns3 QCPU  9Mr1   8Ns2 Shs  PC    12  Request destination 11  Relay station 10  Request source                      Qo                            A     a  Setting example A  The routing parameter must be set for request source 10      10  Request source 11  Relay station 12  Request destination    e   n ose   ae Fs    No Transfer to network Intermediate Intermediate    No  network No  station No     10  Requestsource  1  gy   w   a         12 19 12 19    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC        b  Setting example B  The routing parameters must be set for the request source1   relay station  2   relay station 3   relay station 4   relay station 5   relay station 6   relay  station 7   and relay station 8    In addition  there are two types of routing parameter settings  one is
81. By omitting year and month  data is sent at the  designated time monthly   Point 6   By omitting the year  data is sent at the designated  time every year   Points 7 and 8   Data is sent only once at the designated time        m Specification of low speed cyclic transmission  Transmit data of one station in 1 scan     Fixed term cycle interval setting   500 Sec        System times         es i an  1 3 p fo  2 11 Tsa  50  ee  16 fe fo f  6 6 fi fe jo fo         CO    CI  e                       1  The system timer operates based on the host s clock   If used without matching the clocks on the sending station and receiving    station  there may be a time gap between the stations     2  When handling multiple data without the block guarantee per station function  new and old data may coexist   Apply interlocks to prevent the coexistense        12 8 12 8    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       MELSEC    12 3 Transient Transmission Function    The transient transmission function performs data communication only when it is  requested between stations     In the MELSECNET H  data communication can be performed with other stations    having the same network number  the same network as where the host is connected    as well as with stations having other network numbers     1  Transient transmission function to a station on the same network    1Mp1 1N    Network No 1      2  Transient transmission to stations on other networks  routing function   In this case  the routing parameters must be 
82. CNET H board  carry out the diagnosis  in the  Memory I O test  screen     HE mnn E e nek are  Refer to Section 9 2 9              If you are accessing a multiple CPU system or redundant CPU     system  set the access destination in the  Target  screen    OO Refer to Section 9 2 10              If the MELSECNET 10 board is used in the personal  computer where the MELSECNETH H board is installed   set it in the  Driver  screen     HES EA eze NEKENE Refer to Section 9 2 11          End    TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 2 2 Board list screen operation    This operation displays the hardware information  and confirms and sets the channel  No  set in the MELSECNET H board      1  Board List Screen    PR MELSECNET H utility ZEL    Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory 1 0 Test   Target 4         Board List    Channel No  Board Name IRQ No  Port Memory 170 Port Version    1  5I    MNET Hfopticalfibe  CC  11   FS380000 lt   gt F539FFFFH  FEDI lt   gt FEFFH fie  E E Jin j     BER   J   ES  AE SS E Ez1    AIR E   n TN TN i FERT an    Channel No  Confirm Channel No  Setting       Device Monitor   Help    Channel No  Displays the MELSECNET H board s channel No     Displays the model name of the connected MELSECNET H board   The contents displayed on the screen and the corresponding MELSECNET H  board s model name are as shown below     Screen Display Model Name    MNET H  Optical fiber  Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S
83. CPU and Q25PHCPU        Redundant CPU    Generic term for Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU        QCPU  Q mode     Generic term for Basic model QCPU  Universal model QCPU  High Performance model  QCPU  Process CPU and Redundant CPU        QJ71LP21    Abbreviation for QJ71LP21  QU71LP21G  Q71LP21GE  QU71LP21 25  QJ71LP21S 25   MELSECNET H network module    However  if shown for a particular model  QU71LP21  QU71LP21G  Q71LP21GE   QJ71LP21 25  QJ71LP21S 25 is entered        QJ71BR11    Abbreviation for QJ71BR11 MELSECNET H network module        Network module    Generic term for QJU71LP21  QJ71BR11       MELSECNET H    Abbreviation for Q corresponding MELSECNET H network system        MELSECNET 10  MELSECNET H  10 Mbps     AnU corresponding  QnA Q4AR corresponding MELSECNET 10 network system   Abbreviation in case of using MELSECNET H board with communication rate of 10 Mbps        MELSECNET H  25 Mbps     Abbreviation in case of using MELSECNET H board with communication rate of 25 Mbps        MELSECNET H mode    Abbreviation in case of using MELSECNET H board and network module with  MELSECNET H        MELSECNET H Extended  mode    Abbreviation for the extended MELSECNET H mode  which is extended in the maximum  number of link points per station        MELSECNET 10 mode       Abbreviation in case of using MELSECNET H board and network module with  MELSECNET 10        MEANING AND CONTENTS OF THE TERMS  This section describes meaning and contents of the terms in this manual    1  Abbrev
84. Developer connected to other station   s PLC or at areas SW70 to SW73        x3  The status can be checked on the Network diagnostics of GX Developer connected to other station   s PLC or at areas  SW74 to SW77    4  This status is irrelevant when rebooting the personal computer without turning off its power     App   10 App   10    APPENDIX       Appendix 5 Warning Message Appears on Windows      Appendix 5 1 Overview of warning message    MELSEC    When an operating system with the user account control function is used  a warning  message appears when you run the MELSECNETHH utility or the Device monitor utility      Refer to Section 9 1      lt Using Windows Vista    Windows Server    2008 gt     User Account Control    LP  An unidentified program wants access to your computer    Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it    before   E  NETHUTL exe  l Unidentified Publisher   gt  Cancel  I don t know where this program is from or what it s for    gt  Allow  Itrust this program  I know where it s from or T ve used it before   Y  Details    User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer           App   11     lt Using Windows   7 gt        3  User Account Control x       1  Do you want to allow the following program from an  NAZ unknown publisher to make changes to this computer     Program name  NETHUTL exe    Publisher  Unknown  File origin  Hard drive on this computer  Y  Show details  ves   No      Change when these not
85. Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires  or    install them close to each other   They should be installed 100 mm  3 94 inch  or more from each other   Not doing so could result in noise that would cause malfunctioning         Installation Instructions     ZA CAUTION    e Use the board in an environment as described in the general specifications listed in this  operating manual    If the board is used in an environment outside the ranges described in the general  specifications  it may result in an electric shock  fire  malfunctioning  damage to or deterioration  of the product    e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before installing  or removing the board  If all power is not turned off  this will result in failure of the board or  malfunctioning    e Install the board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express    standard  Refer to  Section 2 5 Operating Environment    Failure to do so may cause a failure or  malfunction    e Securely mount the board to the PCI slot of the mounting device    If the board is not mounted correctly  this may lead to malfunctioning  failure or cause the board  to fall    e Insert the communication cable securely into the board connector  After it has been inserted   check to make sure that it is not being lifted up    A faulty connection can lead to faulty input or output    e When mounting the board  take care not to
86. ELSECNET H Board    1Mp1    cpu  Qu71 CPU  QJ71   CPU   QJ71  1Ns2 i MINS3 1  1Ns4    Lie scale bel  J                      DAZ           PE ET e Z   CPU  QJ71 CPU   QJ71  1Ns7 1Ns5                   7 3 4 Designation of the I O master station    The master station  the control station  can be set in each block for 1 1 communication  using LX LY regardless of the station type  either the control station or the normal  station     Each of block 1 and block 2 has one I O master station  which is set by the send range   LX LY  of each station in each block    Specify the I O master station with the  Common parameter setting  screen of the  MNETH utility if the MELSECNET H board is control station     7 3 5 Reserved station setting    The reserved station designation function is used to prevent stations to be connected  in future  stations that are not actually connected but included in the total number of   slave  stations of a network  from being treated as faulty stations    The reserved stations do not affect the link scan time  they do not slow down the  network even if used as reserved stations    Specify the reserved station with the  Common parameter setting  screen of the  MNETH utility     7 3 6 Pairing Setting    In the pairing setting  station numbers of network modules composing a redundant  CPU system can be set as pairs     Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual   PLC to PLC network     7 PARAMETER SETTINGS       MELSEC    7 4 Supplementary Set
87. ELSECNET H Device           gt  PCI MELSECNET H Controller  lt    _   _ Status after the installation of  B na    j the MELSECNET H board   A Mice and other pointing devices    H Monitors             3  When the installation is aborted or failed  When the installation is aborted or the MELSECNET H board is not recognized   reinstall the driver by the following procedure   1  Uninstall  PCI MELSECNET H Controller  on the Windows   Device  Manager screen   2  Restart the personal computer   3  Install the driver by following the installation procedure       If the driver cannot be installed  confirm the following settings     lt  For Windows XP  gt    If  Block   Never install unsigned driver software  is selected under  Control Panel      System     Hardware     Driver Signing   the driver may not be installed     Select  Ignore   Install the software anyway and don t ask for my approval   or   Warn   Prompt me each time to choose an action   and install the driver   e Do not uninstall or disable  PCI MELSECNET H Controller  on the Windows    Device Manager when the MELSECNET H board is normally recognized   If it is uninstalled or disabled  the operating system may shut down  blue screen         8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE       MELSEC    8 1 3 Screens displayed during installation and corresponding actions    For the screens displayed during the installation  follow the procedures as instructed    below      1  Using Windows   95 Windows   98 Windows N
88. F ANU B O    Q80BD J71LP21 25   Q80BD J71LP21S 25   Q80BD J71BR11 SWODNC MNETH B  Q80BD J71LP21G    Q80BD J71LP21GE  Q80BD J71GP21 SX                   A  1 02C  A  1 11M    Q80BD J71GP21S SX   SW1DNC MNETG B  Q81BD J71GP21 SX A  1 12N   Q81BD J71GP21S SX  Q81BD J71GF11 T2 SW1DNC CCIEF B O  Win 2000   Windows   2000 Professional Win XP   Windows   XP Professional Server 2003   Windows Server   2003 R2  Vista   Windows Vista   Server 2008   Windows Server   2008 Win 7   Windows   7         Can be operated simultaneously   ZA   Operable simultaneously for versions indicated in the parentheses or later   x   Cannot be operated simultaneously     App   19 App   19    APPENDIX MELSEC        b  64 bit version operating system  1  For Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25   Q80BD J71BR11  Q80BD J71LP21G   Q80BD J71LP21GE  Q81BD J71LP21 25    Supported OS    Board model name Software package name  Server 2003   Server 2008 Win 7    SWOIVDWT MNET10P  A70BDE J71QLP23   SW1IVDWT MNET10P  A70BDE J71QLP23GE B  A70BDE J710BR13 ISW2DNF MNET1O _    SW3DNF MNET10    A80BDE J61BT13    AA80BDE A2USH S1 SWODNF ANU B X  SW1DNF ANU B    Q80BD J61BT11N SW  DNG CGBD2 B a  Q81BD J61BT11 i i    Q80BD J71GP21 SX   Q80BD J71GP21S SX A  SW1DNC MNETG B  1 12N    Q81BD J71GP21 SX j   Q81BD J71GP21S SX    Q81BD J71GF11 T2 ___ SW1DNC CCIEF B    Server 2003   Windows Server   2003 R2 Server 2008   Windows Server   2008 R2 Win 7   Windows  7       O   Can be operated simultaneously   ZA   Operable simultaneously
89. Found New Hardware Wizard    2  Select  Search for the best driver in these locations     lt For 32 bit version operating system   gt     Please choose your search and installation options        Search for the best driver in these locations     Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search  which includes local    Check  Include this location in the search  and specify  paths and removable media  The best driver found will be installed   seach removable media ope  CD ROM     Drivers Win2000 x86  of the CD ROM drive to be used     Include this location in the search     DADrivers win2000 86 3  Example   D  Drivers Win2000 x86         Dont search    will choose the driver to install    inion eau OS  lt For 64 bit version operating system   gt   Check  Include this location in the search  and specify    Drivers Win2000 x64  of the CD ROM drive to be used    Example   D  Drivers Win2000 x64     1  The operating system can be checked by Windows system  information   For details  refer to the Microsoft   Knowledge Base     http   support microsoft com kb 827218   As of August 2011            End    d  Using Windows Vista     Windows Server   2008     round New Piarchwvare Ea  1  The  Found New Hardware  screen is displayed   Windows needs to install driver software for your Network Select  Locate and install driver software  recommended       Controller    i Locate and install driver software  recommended     ws will guide you through the p s of installing driver
90. H boards and MELSECNET 10  boards        3 3 3 3    3 SPECIFICATIONS  MELSEC       3 3 Optical Fiber Cable Specification    For the optical fiber cable specification  refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H  Network System Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network       3 4 Coaxial Cable Specification    For the coaxial cable specification  refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network  System Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network       4 FUNCTION                   This chapter explains the function of MELSECNET H board   4 1 Function List  The following flowchart shows the function list for MELSECNET H board   Basic Cyclic transmission function      Communication LB LW  functions  Periodical communication    _ Communication LX LY  RAS function                           Automatic return function Refer to Q Corresponding  j     MELSECNET H Network System      Control station switch function  Reference Manual      Control station return control function  PLC to PLC network       Loopback function  optical loop system  4  t  Prevention of station failure by using external  power supply  optical loop system   L Diatnostic function EAT TT L A ATNA Section 6 5  6 6  Application Direct access  to lINK davis     i 545548   k   i   AEA KE  AN Y   KOYA KURM AAN r   ew AAAA rA WA Re    RO      HEW   S     HER   n    EASE AA F   Section 12 1  functions  Cyclic transmission function     Low speed cyclic transmission vvevevenenevenesnnnnennnnen Section 12 2   Periodical communication   Transient t
91. Hlp32 exe    which is needed to    display the Help screen   Note  The personal computer needs to be connected to  the internet       lt Using Windows Vista    lt Using Windows   7 gt    Windows Server   2008 gt      Windows Help and Support        wd  es      Ask Options   D  lt  Ii A Ask Options    EZE P    Why can t I get Help from this program  Why can t I get Help from this program     The Help for this program was created in Windows Help format   which was used in previous versions of Windows and it is not  5 ted in Window                The Help for this program was created in Windows Help format  which depends on a  feature that isn t included in this version of Windows  However  you can download a  program that will allow you to view Help created in the Windows Help format    or more information  see Windows Help program    For more information  go to the Microsoft Help and Support website     WinHlp32 exe  is no longer included with Windows on the       kad   someone or expand your search E  More support options  iD Offline Help v pM Offline Help v     1  Click the button                  2  The screen shown above opens  Click the link section    3  The Microsoft technical information page opens   http   support microsoft com kb 917607  AS of May 2010     Follow the instruction and download the Windows Help program   WinHIp32 exe       4  Install the file that has been downloaded        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 2 MNETH Utility  This section explains th
92. How to check whether route switching occurred or not  When communication is being made in Target system  whether  communication is continued by route switching due to communication  error can be estimated    Create a program that will monitor the following special relay and  special registers      lt Special relay and special registers to be monitored and estimated possibility of route switching gt     sm1600     SD1590 2   SD1690   Possibility of route switching    OFF Either one is other than 0 Since a system switching request from the network module was 2  Fig  1  detected  route switching may have been executed     Since an other system fault occurred  route switching may ehe Ra    been executed   Since an other system fault occurred or a system switching   ON Either one is other than O   request from the network module was detected  route switching  may have been executed     App   7         1  Even if SM1600 is ON  route switching does not occur when the  CPU is not accessed via the tracking cable    x2  When using SM1600  SD1590 and SD1690 to estimate whether  route switching has occurred or not for the Redundant CPU  connected to MELSECNET H  check the following items in the  redundant setting of the network parameter dialog box of GX  Developer   e Issue a system switching request at disconnection detection   e Issue a system switching request at communication error     Check the following based on the statuses of the above special relay   and special registers  and 
93. ION    Always trust software from  MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC  instal   J Don t instait_   CORPORATION  a    B You should only install driver software from publishers you trust  How can I decide which device  software is safe to install     This screen may be displayed a couple of times                    8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE  MELSEC       8 2 Uninstallation    This section explains a procedure for uninstalling the software package      1  Uninstallation precautions   The following are the precautions when uninstalling the software package    e Log on as a user having administrator authority      Make sure to close other applications running on Windows    including resident  software such as antivirus software  before installation      Check if the display settings on the  Device Manager  or other relevant  functions are correct  and install an appropriate display driver   Or update the Windows   operating system      The language switching function of the operation system set by  Regional and  Language Options  on the Control Panel screen is not supported   The installation or uninstallation may not work normally if the language setting  is changed      2  Uninstallation procedure  1  Uninstall the software package from the control panel of Windows          If the dialog box confirming the deletion of common files appears at uninstallation   make the setting to keep all common files   If deleting common files  other applications may not operate normall
94. ION    Solder the coaxial cable properly     If the soldering is incomplete  it may cause the module malfunction    e For the communication cable  specialized skills and tools are required to connect  the plug and cable  The connector plug itself is a custom part   When purchasing  consult your local Mitsubishi representative     If the connection is incomplete  this can result in a short  fire or malfunction    e Be sure to fix communication cables connecting to the board by placing them in the  duct or clamping them   Cables not placed in the duct or without clamping may be hang freely and  accidentally pulled  which may cause damage to the board or cable  or malfunction  due to bad cable contacts        Refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual   PLC to PLC network   for details of each communication cable     6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC        3  Precautions on external power supply cable wiring    e Verify the rated voltage and pin assignment of the product and connect the external  Z CAUTION power supply cable properly   Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating  imperfect cable crimping  or faulty wiring may cause a fire or failure   e Use a specified tool for crimping of the cable and contacting pin  Imperfect crimping  may cause malfunction   e Verify the pin assignment and fully insert the crimped contacting pin into the    connector  Imperfect insertion may cause failure or malfunction   
95. LSEC    14 5 3 Flowchart to use when communication is disabled from time to time during user    program execution       Did the user program  return an error code           Start MNETH utility and check the each  station status     Is there any faulty station     Set a system configuration that  includes only the control station and  host station     Is the link normal     Add adjacent stations one after the  other and perform link monitor for a  sufficient period        14 18            Confirm the definition of the error using  the error code table  and check the user  program and access station     Refer to MELSEC Data Link Library  Reference Manual              j    Replace the link cable or faulty       station        Replace the link cable or additional  station connected     14 18    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       14 5 4 Flowchart to use when system reset or system hang up occurred in operating system               Is  PCI MELSECNET H  Controller  on the Device  Manager uninstalled    YES                Do not uninstall or disable   PCI MELSECNET H Controller    Remove all boards which are not used           Remove all optical boards and restart  the PC     Did the OS start normally     Is a MELSECNET 10  board being used                     Did the OS start  in the VGA mode for  Windows NT    or in the Safe  mode for OS other than  Windows NT     Set the address of the I O port used  by the MELSECNET 10 board in the  driver settings in the MNETH utility  
96. LSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual corresponds to  MELSEC Data Link  Function HELP  of SWODNC MNETH B version 22Y or earlier  Depending on other  installed software packages   MELSEC Data Link Function HELP  and  MELSEC  Data Link Library Programmer   s Reference  may be both displayed  In this case  refer  to  MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual      gt 3  The MELSEC data link library manual is not registered when Windows   95   Windows   NT or Windows   98 is used as OS  MELSEC Data Link Library Reference  Manual is stored on the CD ROM of software package with PDF file  Manuals in  printed form are sold separately for single purchase  Order a manual by quoting the       manual number  refer to  Relevant Manuals       When the utility is installed on the personal computer running Windows Vista        Windows Server   2008  or Windows   7  MELSECPowerManager is installed  automatically   For details of MELSECPowerManager  refer to Appendix 11        8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE  MELSEC        3  When installation is aborted or failed  When the installation is aborted or failed  reinstall the utility by the following  procedure   1  If the utility can be uninstalled  uninstall it    Refer to Section 8 2    2  Restart the personal computer   3  Install the utility by following the installation procedure     When the utility has been installed on Windows   95 and if the utility is not displayed  properly  reboot the personal computer and reinsta
97. LSECNET H board     mdReceiveEx Batch reads devices   Extended function      mdRandWEx  Writes devices randomly   Extended function   1     mdControl Remote operation of programmable controller CPU      RUN STOP PAUSE      mdBdRst Resets the board     mdSend  ees  mdReceive  e    D   EB    mdDevSet  sets a bit device      1  A function in which the access range is extended according to the extension of  the device points at the access target  It is accessible to all device numbers   Use extended functions when creating a new program     2   Q QnA dedicated instruction    Refer to  MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual  for the details of the  functions        10 2    11 PROGRAMMIN  k       MELSEC       11 PROGRAMMING    11 1 Cautions in Programming       This section explains concerning cautions in the case that a program is created using  data on a network     11 1 1 Interlock related signals  Show a list of the interlock signal devices used in the user program   For other hosts and other stations  refer to the  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H    Network System Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network   about the operating status  and setting status  etc     11 1 11 1    11 PROGRAMMING       on       MELSEC    Assignment of link special relays  SB  and link special registers  SW  when multiple  boards are installed    Off  0  On  1     SB20  Module status Indicates the communication status between Normal Abnormal  MELSECNET H board and personal computer     11 2    Baton pass st
98. MELSECNETI H board cannot be used in a remote I O net   It can be used only in a PLC to PLC network     Multi thread Communications    The MELSEC data link library cannot be accessed from multiple threads within  the same process     Access the MELSEC data link library with a single thread     Service applications    The MELSEC data link library cannot be accessed from Windows   Service  applications   Access the MELSEC data link library from a user application     Multiprocessor based personal computers    For details on the compatible operating system and driver software version  when using multiprocessor based personal computers  refer to Section 2 5     Compatibility with Hyper Threading technology    For details on the compatible operating system and driver software version  when using the hyper threading technology on the personal computer  refer to  Section 2 5     Operating environment of the personal computer used  Refer to Section 2 5 in this manual     INTRODUCTION    Thank you for purchasing the Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD   J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE  Q80BD J71BR11 MELSECNET H Interface Board    Before using this product  please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop  familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD   J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE  Q80BD J71BR11 MELSECNETZ H Interface Board  to handle the product correctly     CONTENTS   SAFETY F
99. MITSUBISHI    Mitsubishi PC Interface Board    MELSEG    MELSECNET H Interface Board  User s Manual  For SWODNC MNETH B           Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Mie Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71BR11       e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e     Be sure to read these instructions before using the product      Before using this product  read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully  and handle the product correctly with full attention to safety    Note that these precautions apply only to this product  Refer to the user s manual of the CPU module for  safety precautions on programmable controller systems    In this manual  the safety instructions are ranked as  A WARNING   and   A CAUTION         Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions     zk WARNING resulting in death or severe injury     Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions     Z  N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage        Note that failure to observe the   CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results depending  on the circumstances    Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety    Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user      Design Instructions       A WARNING    e Make sure to see this manual for information about each station s operating status when a  communication error occurs in the network  Erroneous outpu
100. NET 10 Board MELSECNET 10 Board  MELSECNET H Board    MELSECNET H Board   first board    second board    third board    first board   second board   I O port designated I O port designated vO   ort not  lt   Set Channel No  Channel 51 Channel 52 Cannot be used  Channel 53 Channel 54    If the item  The channel is used from channel 51 with the MELSECNET 10 board  detected automatically and the channel of the remainder is used the  MELSECNET H board   or   The channel is used from 51 with the MELSECNET 10  board of specified I O port and the channel of the remainder is used the  MELSECNET H board   is selected  and MELSECNET 10 boards are used   MELSECNET 10 channel numbers are assigned in dual port address order     App   2 App   2    APPENDIX MELSEC       Appendix 2 Procedures for Replacing Boards  This section explains the procedure to replace a MELSECNET H board      1  Replacement procedure    Record the channel numbers and parameter settings that were used before the replacement  f    Refer to Chapter 7   PARAMETER SETTING   Section 9 2 2  Board list screen operation   When the PC is powered on  power off it       Remove the target MELSECNET H board from the PC              Install the target MELSECNET H board to the PCI bus slot of the PC        Fix the MELSECNET H board with the PC s board fixing screws        For other than Q80BD J71LP21S 25 For Q80BD J71LP21S 25       Make an external  power supply cable      Refer to Section 6 4 4  External power    Connect the exter
101. NET H board did not operate normally upon startup      1  For Windows   95  Windows   98       START             Was the OS    able to start normally  NO        Did it hung up while starting or  display a system error on  a blue screen           YES            Is a mark  displayed next to the  PCI  MELSECNETI H Controller  item  in the device manager  screen        YES           NO       Is there a driver  error message displayed in  the error viewer     YES       NO    Start the MNETH utility                 Did the MNETH  utility start operating normally  and display the correct number of  loaded MELSECNET H  boards     NO        Is the  RUN  LED  on the MELSECNET H  board lit         YES       14 5                Remove all MELSECNET H boards    Was the OS  able to start normally    Did it hung up while starting or  display a system error on  a blue screen                          Reinstall the Windows   95   Windows   98 or call Microsoft        Process in accordance with  The driver is  not normally installed  in section 14 2    Cause Determination Methods by Type  of Trouble      Process in accordance with the error  contents in section 14 3 1               Remove other optical board s  and leave  only the MELSECNETI H board s         Did the MNETH  utility start operating normally       YES               The resources used by the MELSECNET H  board  IRQ  I O address  etc   are conflicting  with those used by the system used in the  personal computer or by another board
102. OBEH   Exceeding 2Kb  2  SWOO0C6H    Cable fault  Hardware error  noise  etc   SWOOBFH   DPLL Error  SW00C7H     2   Basically  the number of times for each error occurrence does not matter  However  following corrective actions are       required  if the count value raises frequently during operation     1  Confirm the power ON OFF statuses of the host station and other station     2     3     4         5  Wire the cable again with reference to the network module manual and MELSECNET H board manual  In addition     Check the cable and connector  connector disconnection  loose connection  cable breakage  cable length  etc     Conduct self   loopback test  internal self loopback test and hardware test   Conduct station to station test and forward reverse loop test     install the devices again with reference to the user   s manual for the CPU module     TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 2 9 Memory  I O Test screen operation    This operation diagnoses between the MELSECNET H board and personal computer      1  If you are starting the diagnosis  do so after disconnecting the external cables      2  If you desire to switch screens during the diagnosis  click the button        switching screens after stopping the diagnosis       MELSECNET H utility Oix     Board list   Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor Memory 1 0 Test   Target 4             Channel   51 MELSECNETJH  1 slot   f            Diagnosis  Address Count  Port Memory  F5380000 l
103. R  LED lights up     Hardware error     The connector was disconnected during the test     6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       6 6 2 Forward loop Reverse loop test    Using the forward loop   reverse loop test you can check the Q80BD J71LP21 25   Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE  network module and cable hardware after all the stations have been connected with  optical fiber cable  and can also check if the IN and OUT cables have been connected  correctly     The forward loop reverse loop test can be used only when the Q80BD J71LP21 25     Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G or Q80BD   J71LP21GE is used as the control station  If it is a normal station  carry out the test  from the control station of the network where the normal station is connected         1  Test mode settings  If you are performing the forward loop test  set the station executing the forward  loop test on  Forward loop test  in the mode settings in the  Board Information   screen of the MNETH utility   Also  for stations other than the station where the test is being run  treat them as  Online   If you are performing the reverse loop test  set the station executing the forward  loop test on  Reverse loop test  in the mode settings in the  Board Information   screen of the MNETH utility     Mode     Forward loop test ae      Setting    St be er statio  Test between slave station  Self loopback test        2  Start of the tes
104. RATION       MELSEC    Programming language     English version     Microsoft   Visual Basic   5 0   Microsoft   Visual Basic   6 0   Microsoft   Visual Basic    NET 2003  Microsoft   Visual Studio   2005 Visual Basic    Microsoft   Visual Studio   2008 Visual Basic    Microsoft   Visual Studio   2010 Visual Basic    Microsoft   Visual C     5 0   Microsoft   Visual C     6 0   Microsoft   Visual C      NET 2003  Microsoft   Visual Studio   2005 Visual C      Microsoft   Visual Studio   2008 Visual C      Microsoft   Visual Studio   2010 Visual C             1  Windows   XP  64 bit version  and Windows Vista    64 bit version  are not supported    2  For a combination of the operation system and the programming language  refer to the Microsoft      Knowledge Base     2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  MELSEC        1  Instructions for personal computer   a  PCI standard  Using a personal computer not compliant with the PCI or PCI Express    standard may result in a problem due to poor electrical contact  erroneous  operation  etc   For details on the number of boards that can be installed  installation slot    and occupied slots  refer to Section 3 2    b  The functions being added    Multiprocessor 19V or later   c  The functions cannot be used    The hyper threading technology is not supported by Windows   95   Windows   98  Windows NT     and Windows   2000  Disable the hyper   threading technology in the BIOS settings of PC     A multiprocessor configuration is not supported by Wind
105. RECAU TIONS   53 x2x xay   n a   da n   Ak cay dan Ae Aka Ke ds eat ken bee   k cak kwe KA    Kar A KE Ne TENA      AKAR A A  1  CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Trupia dar   y eley Nen k   lee RRA K   k MA ele a AA EE A  5  REV  N O ani anan yek   Kera k3 Db Fan En   DX D   N R   AN AE KA D   YD e   n HEZ   Db E P   EREK DIK BI NE    Neb LA Ob En Hep k    RE3 abi eye Y   A  6  PRECAUTIONS FOR USE      4 u 4 4540254444444x44405 254454 y44wlckada wize   a 21j   la ke ww   a k   Va Ak   za V   esket   di uv a ch   l  enn A 10  INTRODUC TION a r raa e cr A 11  es za  rzz gt  gt tooo  o  g__ w_      m       e  anmm    b  m          W  Ww    s  s    Ws  sseeeebebebeb n  n A 11  MANUALS  lt           kal i   r eel eae ite ah dive Hane   K Kene WEKA HERS Haden ake ite ahaa A 16  HOW  TO USE THIS MANUAL o  2 sie Set oe  et NA ae ha he ae WA ee a A eee ec eee A 17  GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS    0     ceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeenas A 19  MEANING AND CONTENTS OF THE TERMS     iii kek EEE kek kK kk KA AK KAK AKA KAK KAK AKA KAK A KA KAK KA HA A AR AA A 21  PAGKING EIS Tuy ly aa n4 an mila   dala niban et ead et ied et de ede et deeded      k kulla ted      kh w  le ade A 21  VV OVOIVIOW  iver ected cetera vielen deat aa a t ia ita 1  1  12 SPE SIL    Sn y   nnn    0 cher on cn ten ee en ohn Aen eer an oh Ah ered ares 1  2  2 1 MELSECNET H Board System Configuration       0   cccecceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeesa
106. Section 8 2 3  Section 10 3   Section 10 3 3  Section 10 3 4  Section 10 8  Section 11 3  Chapter 12   Section 14 4  Section 14 5 5  Section 14 6  Appendix 3         The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover     Print Date    Manual Number    Dec   2004  SH  NA  080128 G Chapter numbers of 5 to 14 were changed to 6 to 15 respectively     Precautions for use  Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Chapter 1   Section 1 1  Section 1 2  Section 1 3  Section 2 1  Section 2 4   Section 2 5  Section 3 2  Chapter 7  Section 7 1  Section 7 2 4   Section 9 2 2  Section 9 2 3  Section 9 2 5  Section 9 2 10   Section 9 2 11  Section 10 1 2  Section 10 2  Section 13 2 1   Section 15 4 3    Addition    Section 2 6  Chapter 5  Section 15 7    Jun   2005  SH  NA  080128 H  Model addition    Q80BD J71LP21S 25    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  INTRODUCTION    Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Product List    Section 1 2  Section 2 1  Section 2 5  Section 3 2  Section 4 1   Section 6 1  Section 6 3  Section 6 4  Section 6 5  Section 6 6   Section 7 2 1  Section 8 1 2  Section 9 2 2  Section 9 2 6    Section 9 3 5  Section 11 4  Section 11 6  Section 12 3  Chapter 13   Chapter 14  Section 15 2  Section 15 4 4  Section 15 6  Section 15 7   Section 15 8  Appendix 4  Appendix 5    Addition    Section 6 4 4  Section 15 6  Appendix 4  Appendix 6 2    Jul  2005   SH NA  080128 I    Section 2 5  Appendix 6 2    Oct  2005   SH NA  080128 J  Section 2 5  Section 8 1 1  Section 8 1 2  Section 8 3  Se
107. Standby   At the time of TRK CABLE ERR  Error code   system system system 6120  occurrence  System not determined    smisie  1e SM1815   oN   OFF   FF  SMI516       App   5 App   5    APPENDIX       MELSEC     3  Retry processing for error that will occur during system switching  processing  When the MELSEC data link library is used to access the Redundant CPU during  system switching being processed by the Redundant CPU  a system switching  error  error code 4248     CPU starting error  error code 4004     other system  CPU module error  error code 4245n  access destination illegal error  error code  FFDF  or similar error occurs   Create a program that will check the error code and perform retry processing as  necessary in that case      a  The following indicates the functions that will result in error if  executed during system switching     ee   Functions that will result in error by system switching    mdControl mdDevRst mdDevSet mdRandR mdRandW   MELSEC data link library  mdReceive mdSend mdTypeRead   b  The following example gives a flowchart for error occurrence  at batch write               Write processing   mdSend instruction   etc     Has error occurred                  Error code is checked   1       Does the error  require retry processing     YES Retry processing              Wait processing    Normal processing is executed     is executed     Error handling is executed              1  For the details and corrective action of the error code  refer to  Error  c
108. T    Windows   2000 Windows Server   2003 R2 Windows   XP    Click the button     Readonly File Detected E x    An option you selected requires that files be installed to your system  or files be  uninstalled from your system  or both   amp  read only file   C AWINNT System32 Drivers AMneth2k  sys  was found while performing the  needed file operations on your system  To perform the file operation  click the     Yes button  otherwise  click No     I Dont display this message again          Software Installation        The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo     testing to verify its compatibility with this version of Windows   Tell  me why this testing is important      Continuing your installation of this software may impair  or destabilize the correct operation of your system  either immediately or in the future  Microsoft strongly  recommends that you stop this installation now and  contact the software vendor for software that has  passed Windows Logo testing           Security Alert   Driver Installati    1  The driver software you are installing for   Hi  WinDriver  has not been properly signed with Authenticode TM  technology   Therefore  Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified  since it was published  The publisher s identity cannot be verified    because of a problem    The installed INF file does not contain digital signature  information     Do you still want to install this driver software     J  Mate ino          Security Alert  
109. T CD ROM drive        D  Drivers winds Us     Browse          ee           End     8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE  MELSEC        b  Using Windows   2000       1  The  Found New Hardware Wizard  screen is displayed   Install Hardware Device Drivers S     m   R  Adevce dive a seliro program that enables a hardware device to work with PAS Select  Search for a suitable driver for my device  This wizard wil complete the installation for this device   recommended   and click the   Next gt    button     Q3  Network Controller    A device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work  Windows  needs driver files for your new device  To locate driver files and complete the  installation click Next        What do you want the wizard to do           Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that   can choose a specific       l          2  Select  Specify a location  and click the   Next gt    button   Locate Driver Files  whee do you want Windows to search for driver files  S gt     Search for driver files for the following hardware device     6 gt  Network Controller    The wizard searches for suitable drivers in its driver database on your computer and in  any of the following optional search locations that you specify    To start the search  click Next  If you are searching on a floppy disk or CD ROM drive   insert the floppy disk or CD before clicking Next     Optional search locations   T Floppy disk drives          Conca    L  3  S
110. T H board   259  103r  The number of MELSECNET H boards detected exceeds the   Remove MELSECNET H boards until the number     maximum number that can be loaded  falls within the maximum limit  Check f   lappi tti ith oth tional  260  104s    The board conflicts with other device  ee o evene PPMI   eb O WE omit Okan    An attempt to link the device name has failed  Reinstall Windows       An attempt to perform interrupt registration has failed  board    An error occurred when reading VO  Replace the MELSECNET H board      268 10Cx    An error occurred during receiving process    _______kkl lk  __     269 10Ds  __  An error occurred during sending process    _____  gt  5  An error occurred during loTimer process  Reinstall Windows       An error occurred during DPC process     A WDT error occurred on the MELSECNET H board driver    288  120  J       Restart the PC  If the error persists  reinstall  Windows           14 7 14 7    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       Event ID Error content Corrective action  0 to FFFFu  1     Occurs when the driver for the  MELSECNETI H board was installed first   After installing SWODNC MNETHGB  restart  279  1171  An error occurred when writing to registry database  the computer and confirm that this error does  not occur   2  Increase the system memory and disk  capacity     280  118x  A request that cannot be processed was received from other  station    281  119  Retry transmission was executed during transmission eee ed  process     
111. TTINGS       MELSEC    Data links can be executed even if the parameters are not set    In that case  the MELSECNET H board operates with the default state displayed in  the  Board Information  screen for the channel  network type  network No   station  No   control station normal station settings and group No    When the network type of the control station is the MELSECNET H Extended mode   the following condition occurs in a normal station with no parameters set     In the case of a programmable controller  LINK PARA ERROR occurs   In the case of aMELSECNET H board   L ERR   LED lights up     In such a case  set parameters to the normal station     7 1 Board Information Settings    This sets the channel and network type for the MELSECNET H board that is being  used  Perform the settings in the  Board Information  screen of the MNETH utility      1  Channel  Select the MELSECNET H board for which settings are performed in the MNETH  utility   A maximum of 4 MELSECNET H boards can be installed in one personal  computer  The channels that are assigned to each MELSECNET H board can be    checked by clicking the   Channel No  Confirm   button in the  Board List     screen      2  Network type  The settings in the mode for the network system where the MELSECNET H  board is connected can be changed     Corresponding network    MNET 10 mode MELSECNET 10       MNET H mode  MNET H EX mode      MELSECNET H     3  Precautions     a      b      c     Set an identical network type for st
112. Tool  Be sure to use the following specified tool     Applicable cable size  91558 1 AW G 20 16 Tyco Electronics    6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION       MELSEC     3  Making external power supply cable  Make an external power supply cable as follows      a     Crimping to the contacting pin   Using a crimping tool  crimp the cable and contacting pin    Set the contacting pin and cable in the grooves of the crimping tool and  squeeze the handle tightly    For details  refer to the instructions of the crimping tool        Check the crimped condition  Check if the cable  including a part  of the sheath  is evenly crimped to  the contacting pin    If only wire part is crimped and not  the sheath part  or if the cable is  stuck out  the cable can be cut off or  malfunction may occur     Contacting pin    Cable    Connecting to the connector Connector  According to the following pin  assignment  fully insert the crimped  cable to the connector until a click  is heard        Contacting pin       Connecting external power supply cable to board   Properly insert the completed external power supply cable to the external power  supply cable connector of the Q80BD J71LP21S 25 until a click is heard    Keep the external power supply cable away from the main circuit cable  power  cables and or load cables connected to other than programmable controllers    Ensure a distance of 100mm  3 94 in   between them      Be sure to twist the external power supply cable        
113. UBLESHOOTING       MELSEC    14 5 Flowchart to Use when Error Occurred During Data Link    The following explains corrective actions when an error occurred during data link     14 5 1 Flowchart to use when unexpected value is input to specific link device    Check the following items     1  Check for a station with link error using the each station status screen     2  Check the parameter assignment range at the control station     3  Check the device range used in the programmable controller program at the  programmable controller      4  Check  in the user program  argument data for the Data Link function accessing  the specific link device     14 5 2 Flowchart to use when data cannot be written or read in user program       Is the communication YES  function s return value  abnormal             Check the error with the error code table   Refer to MELSEC Data Link Library  Reference Manual        Monitor the device to be accessed from  the device monitor utility    Also  perform a data change to see   if data can be written     Can the device be monitored  YES   Was the data written            Check the user program           YES  Did an error occur        Check the error with the error code table   Refer to MELSEC Data Link Library       Reference Manual     YES  Was it host access        Check the MELSECNET H board is  overlapping with the system and other    boards        Check according to the flowcharts in  Section 14 4        14 17 14 17    14 TROUBLESHOOTING       ME
114. ady occurred at  a communication start     for the Redundant CPU specified for the Logical Sta  No    A communication error occurs     If a communication error has occurred  refer to  b  in  4  Automatic switching of   communication route  and remove the communication disturbance     1  First communication after execution of the mdOpen function in the MELSEC  data link library  communication using the mdReceive  mdSend  mdControl   mdDevRst  mdDevSet  mdRandR  mdRandW or mdTypeRead function     e  f other station access  including the programmable controller CPU other than the  Redundant CPU  is made to nine or more stations simultaneously  automatic  switching of communication route may not be executed     The following indicates details of the special relay and special registers to be  monitored when estimating whether route switching occurred or not     Explanation    e Turns on when an error occurs during redundant system error  check   Turns on when either of bits for SD1600    Remains off when no errors are present    e Any of the following bits turns on corresponding to module No  for  network module requesting route switching in host system   Turns off by the system after recovery from error of the relevant  module by user        Other system OFF  No error    SM11600 error flag ON  Error    Bit status  Module No  for Module No  for b15 to b11 to b1 b0 0  OFF    network module   network module sp1690 _0 Pa  foto  10N  SD1590   requesting route   requesting route t modu
115. ally      Activating the application with Windows   compatible mode      Simplified user switch over     Remote desktop     Large font size  Advanced setting of screen property      DPI setting other than 100      Power save mode  Standby  Hibernate  Sleep      The language switching function set by Regional and Language Options  Windows Touch     Windows XP Mode     Windows Touch      When exiting the operating system  always shut down the computer      The behavior of the board and the personal computer when the personal computer  enters the power save mode differs according to the operating system  For details  of error codes and messages when the power save mode set by a user or a  program is entered  refer to Appendix 10      3  Instructions for user program   a  Supported version of SWODNC MNETH B      ser program Supported version of  ur SWODNC MNETH B      32 bit version user program    bit version user   32 bit version user program    All versions    64 bit version user program Version 23Z or later    7K 4  Programs can be created and executed on the 64 bit version operating system   2  Programs can be created on the 32 bit version operating system  however  the  following dialog box appears and cannot be executed    lt When using Windows  XP  32 bit version  gt   C  MELSEC MTEST exe              Xx  C  MELSEC MTEST exe is not a valid  Win32 application         lt When using Windows   7  32 bit version  gt        CAMELSEC MTEST exe  neon         The version of this f
116. an 9 22  9 2 11 Driver screen Operation                 ccccccccescceeeceeeeseeeeneeceeeeceaneeseneeceaeeseaeecsaceeseneeseneeesaeesssesseneeseaeeseneeess 9 23  9 3  Device  Monitor Utility     lt 5  A  cet ces dadeeeee celine ede a a E etieenaenenaden 9 26   KER   Operallon  PrOCCCULG SA WE SN elec i on at oe hee E oa ae ee Se 9 26  9 3 2 Setting as batch montong ernan aaaea A AA a AA A A NRA 9 27  9 3 3 Setting as 16 point Entry MoO   cs yl s   221k rnin EA RE ER 9 28  9 3 4 Setting the monitoring destination         e ec eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseneseaeeeaeseneeaes 9 29  9 3 5 Setting the device to be monitored         eee cece eeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeeeeseeeceeseaeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseneseeeseneeeneeaaes 9 30  9 3 6 Changing word device ValUeS             lliiEEEk kak kaka k AKA KA KAKA K AKA AA AA AKA AKA AA AWA AWA AKA HAA AR 9 31  9 3 7 Changing word device values continuously               iiiiiEEEEk kk kk k kk kek kK KAK kk K AK AK KA 9 32  9 3 8 Tuning on off a Dit COVICE dy S   bk nalan Kek   ned tak ke  ka n e Kek   ke 2 A Ke 1 kar Ka   n   kewa KLA H   Eke KWEZ A ae ek n  9 33  9 3 9 Switching the display TONT a  six lake ld   k  k cah kake KA yek EENEN a kesa h  wa KAKA k  n Kawe y  n    KAKA    wak AWAL 9 33  9 3 10 Numeric  value  input pad 1 1   ji 14  2 11y2  ceil eiaei WE   p  ka HEV WEME eka WELA WEZA E   ke Zek EV e uel kek e DRY    9 34  9 53 11 0O theropefatlo0nS as aa Xik ater ei ie eed a tai re aa e 9 35    A 13 A 13  
117. an an day     cA Za de A 9  3  9 1 4 Verifying the VerSiOn           ccceccscceecceeceteceteceneeeeecenecensecseaensaeteasecenaensasnscensceneaeeeaenceestenseaeeenneaeneaenee 9  4  9 2  MNETH Utility ica hated ne lied ae nl deine el Meine Mil edie dA i eee 9  6  9221    Operating  prO Ce dU    lt  4  ki l   seeks set dilr kek ek ade hate pee E ki d   sedl doe hae bie aa berk k   ee ndi d  e ate sate Ha 9  6  9 2 2 Board list screen operation                LE kk kek   k  k ek kk a KAK kK kk kK kk A KK R KK kK kk KARA 9  7  9 2 3 Board information screen operation                i ili kek kak kek kek kk kk kK kK kK kK kk KK RA 9  9  9 2 4 Routing Parameter Setting screen Operation                 iiiiiiiEEEEEEEEEEkkk kk kk kk kk kk kk 9 11  9 2 5 Common parameter setting Screen operati  On               LiiE kk keke   kk kk kk keka 9 12  9 2 6 Loop monitor screen Operation               cceccccescceeeeceeeceeeeeeeceaeeceaeeeeaeeeeaneeseaeeseaeeecaeeeseaeeseaeeteeteneessaseess 9 16  9 2 7 Each station status screen Operation              ccccccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesceeseaeeceaeeseaeeeseneeseaeeeeeeeeteesieeess 9 17  9 2 8 Error history monitor Screen Operation          ccceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseneseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeeseaeseneeeneteaes 9 18  9 2 9 Memory  I O Test Screen operation                iid kk kk kk   k kk kk kk   k kk KA KAK KK KA KK KA 9 21  9 2 10 Target screen operation  a  i   xE s2  d4444284  0 2225     ka ia ha ku   le sU nek z   da      de   l
118. andby station using  the user program  access is simply made without considering the current  operating system state of the redundant CPU system      6  Compatible with MELSECNET H Extended mode  The MELSECNET H Extended mode is the extended MELECNET H mode   which is extended in the maximum number of link points per station  With this  mode  the maximum number of link points per station can be set to 2000 bytes or  more  i e   up to 35840 bytes   This mode is suitable for the system that needs many number of link points per  station      7  Drivers are provided for compatibility with each OS   Each type of driver is provided  so it is easy to build a system that is compatible  with the user environment   For details on the compatible operating system  refer to Section 2 5      8  User programming functions are provided   Through Microsoft   Visual Basic   and Microsoft   Visual C     compatible  functions  it is possible to carry out remote control of a programmable controller  CPU or read and write to devices  and user programs can be created easily     1 OVERVIEW        9     Control station   Station No 1         MELSEC    External power supply allows continuous network communication  even during power off of personal computer   Function of the  Q80BD J71LP21S 25    Since power is supplied externally  the Q8OBD J71LP21S 25 can continue  network communication  baton passing  even if a personal computer is powered  off and data link cannot be performed    Therefore  a norma
119. ange for each station  LX LY settings             iiE EEE kaka kak KAKA KAKA AKA WA 7  8  Yo n       Total SISE ka nal  n a ceca chad ats fat eset aia iat eee Sect eee eet 7 10  7 3 4 Designation of the I O master Station 00    ecceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeaeeseeseeseeseesieesieesieesiennesieee 7 10   3 5    Reserved station  Setting errre ri eea A AEEA E EAE ERE 7 10  13 6  Pamm Sel ea r r E E gr  7 10   4  Supplementary  setting nesre a a Anaad anna Ke Ke K   A E E RE keke    7 11  7 5 Control Station Return Setting                    ukkk kake kaka kk kaka KA AA A KA AKA KAKA WAA AK WARA AW AAE 7 12  9 1  Installation z    lt  2 lt 4  xr laie ted hae    E teed eh tee he ee e ee ee 8  1  8 411 InstallinguutilitVs yo Wy   a ea neon ead eae eae ad ea cantina ead eae  8  2  3 12  Installing  driver  Sich s ek nah ANBAR ah ad eR ahaa 8  4  8 1 3 Screens displayed during installation and corresponding ACtIONS           eeceeeeeeeeeetteeteeeteeetteettee 8  9  3 2   Uninstallation si    lle  elie lites dimi raala a a   a   a na an Az   a kelya    W   cl a ul ku s   ek lite z  ka ei 8 12  9 UTILITY OPERATIONS 9  1 to 9 40  9 1 Utility Common Operations iiy  4444422814542244 d2 wana lr GEH     l Mi Var a Van de H   EHA a WE Va H   E   Ka   VAR    da 9  1  Ol SEA TM 23 yn Kn A te tien ee tin ae ee A e eo ee ede da   ahs 9  1  TEA Ending a Ull arien yA HED k   Ke ar   LA KA eke E D   kek Ee KEYA inde marae ia WEDA 9  2  6 1 3  Displaying the help SOr       g  k  l  ka nada an kal
120. annot be  verified     When this mode of transient transmission is executed successively  a  no reception  buffer space error   error code  F222  may occur  Design the system thoroughly to  allow for a sufficient interval between executions  and make sure to test  debug  to  confirm that successive executions can be performed without generating any error        12 21 12 21    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC       12 3 4 SEND RECV function    The SEND RECV function sends receives data to from other station s programmable    controller using the MELSEC data link library function   This function supports the SEND RECV instruction of link dedicated instruction for  Q QnA series         1  SEND function  The SEND function sends data from the own station to the specified channel of  the specified station using the mdSend function   Two execution types   arrival acknowledgment  and  no arrival acknowledgment    are available for the SEND function  When sending data with  no arrival  acknowledgment  execution type  all stations in group numbers can be specified  as target stations                         CPU module   Target station Board Driver User application  Channel 1 Channel 1 main      Channel 2 Channel 2                      Channel 3 Channel 3 mdOpen  51   1   amp path     Channel 4 Channel 4   Channel 5 Channel 5 mdSend  path  255        Channel 6 Channel 6 oo                Channel 7  Channel 8    Channel 7  Channel 8          mdClose  path                             1  A
121. ansion areas of 2000H to 3FFFH are used for   16384 points  the low speed cyclic transmission  All areas can be used for the  normal cyclic transmission   The use ranges for each MELSECNET H board and network  OH to 3FFFH   module need to be assigned in the parameter settings for the   16384 points    control station     OH to 1FFFH    8192 points  The use ranges for each MELSECNET H board and network  module need to be assigned in the parameter settings for the   OH to 1FFFH control station     8192 points        If the MELSECNET H board is used in the MELSECNET 10 mode  the device range  for LB LW becomes OH to 1FFFH  8192 points      2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  MELSEC       2 3 Multiple Network System    A multiple network system is a system where multiple networks are connected by relay    stations      1  The network No  can be set at any desired No  in the range 1 to 239      2  The MELSECNET H board cannot be used as a relay station   Please use the network module as a relay station        2 3 1 Configuration    The following example shows how three networks can be connected     Normal station    Normal station Control station  2Ns2    Control station  1Ns2 2Mp1    1Mp1  Personal   QCPU QJ71 Qu71 Personal  computer  gt    LP21 LP21 computer  J71LP21 25 2 J71LP21 25                         Network No 1 Network No 2                                                                 gt   gt     SIQCPU  QJ71  Qa Q  a  sw ebeke a LP21 25  Normal station     ontrol station    2Ns3 
122. are                  cccccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeseeetes App 18  Appendix 7 Checking Serial Number and Function Version l i kk keke kek   App 24  Appendix 8 New and Improved Functions             ccc cccescceeeeceeeeeeceeeeaeeceaeeeeaeeecaeeesaeeseaeeeeaeeeceeesieeessaeeaes App 25  Appendix 9   External Dimensions   iieis iiei ilana eyed clatter bla aac et k  na ba ed dele App 26  Appendix 9 1 Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP216E                  x  44 xxx xx      App 26  Appendix9 2   EQQ80BD J7T1LP215 25  x44  40 15   0 541114  415554ax 1   5   5 x35 xand gk CA er Kar   da kek cin 1n Karl nh Ee ed da   App 26  Appendix 9 3 Q80BD J71BR11 4    keke keke k kek   ka k   ke k   kE kk A KAKA KAKA KK A kK kk    A App 27  Appendix 9 4 083 1BD J71LP2 1525 j      aykn   cle kazi   d   kira evlna    dk pe de   y   e l      derk   Wek D   We desdek    yan dak   App 27  Appendix 10 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode  Standby  Hibernate  Sleep   sain fi bale allan buat E E E pide cost ahdu pest stan zesUends leek bdo bast E A E vensele Meads see dhecsae saavass Oe navies App 28    Appendix 10 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode  standby    When using Windows   NT  Windows   2000  Windows Server   2003  and    WWINGOWS OX Pathe cate tate  Scat a adda inating nuit eeeiat ie At mee te a App 28   Appendix 10 2 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode  hibernate  sleep    When using Windows Vista
123. ased on the requirements of the EMC Directive and the  harmonized standards  However  they do not guarantee that the entire machinery  constructed according to the descriptions complies with the EMC Directive    The manufacture of the machinery must determine the testing method for compliance  and declare conformity to the EMC Directive        5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE  MELSEC       5 1 1 EMC Directive related standards    The standards applicable to the EMC Directive are listed below   All test items were tested by installing each device on a personal computer bearing a  CE certification logo      1  Emission requirements    30M 230MHz  QP  40dB V m  10m in measurement range    5  e 230M 1000MHz  QP  47dB V m  10m in measurement range     CISPR16 2 3 The electromagnetic wave  which the product emits to the  EN61131 2   external space is measured   2007    Radiated emission   1    CISPR16 2 1  The noise level which the  CISPR16 1 2 product emits to the power line  Conducted emission  1 Jis measured       0 15 to 0 5MHz  QP  79dB  Mean  66dB   2    0 5 to 30MHz  QP  73dB  Mean  60dB        1  The tests were conducted installed in a control panel   x2  QP  Quasi peak value  Mean  Average value     2  Immunity requirements    Standard Test description Value specified in standard    EN61000 4 2 An electrostatic discharge is  Electrostatic discharge applied to the enclosure of the  immunity   1 equipment    EN61000 4 3 80  AM modulation 1kHz   Radiated  radio frequency   An 
124. ate the network numbers of the request source and the station that will  function as a bridge  1 between the networks      1  The bridge function refers to sending data via an adjacent network     MELSECNET H board cannot be used as a relay station that function as a bridge   Use the network module for the relay station         1  Stations that require routing parameter setting   a  The setting is required for both the transient transmission request source  and relay stations    b  For the relay stations  two routing settings are required  one from the  request source to the request destination  and the other from the request  destination back to the request source      c  The setting is not required for the request destination     In the example shown in the diagram below where the transient transmission is    executed from 1Ns3 to 3Ns4  the setting is required for the following three stations   1  Setting for 1Ns3 that requests the transient transmission    Designate the network number  3  of the Transfer to  the relay station   1Ns4   and the relay network number  1  to the relay station    2  Setting for 1Ns4 that functions as a bridge  Designate the network number  3  of the Transfer to  the relay station   2Ns4   and the relay network number  2  to the relay station  It is not  necessary to set the return route because it is designated in the setting  for 2Ns4     12 13    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC       3  Setting for 2Ns4 that function as a bridge  It is not ne
125. ation  an  error   71  0047H   No reception data error   occurs because the driver  has not completed the RECV function and thus the receive data have  not yet stored to the reception buffer of the driver    Retry the operation after waiting for a while     12   24    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       MELSEC    12 4 Multiplex Transmission Function  Optical Loop System     12 25          The multiplex transmission function allows high speed communications using duplex  transmission paths  both the forward and reverse loops  in the optical loop system    In order to execute the multiplex transmission function  setting for the  Supplementary  settings  of the common parameters is required  Note that this setting is not allowed  unless the total number of link stations is four stations or more      1  Using the multiplex transmission function  the high speed communication is  performed using both the forward and reverse loops effectively     1Ns3  IN OUT                        Forward loop    IN T    OUT OUT IN OUT IN R    1Ns6 1Ns5 1Ns4 ine verse l000     2  If an error occurs in the transmission path while the multiplex transmission  function is used  data linking continues by communicating only using the  transmission path on one side of either the forward or reverse loop  or by  switching to the communication using loopback  The transmission speed in this  case is 10 Mbps or 25 Mbps     Loopback                   pacan daone noie   b N  DE   Forward loop    TN j UT IN R    4Ns5 
126. ations within the same network    If any different network type is included  the system does not operate  normally    For the MELSECNET H Extended mode  use the MELSECNET H board of  ROM version 2X or later and the SWODNC MNETH B of version 11M or  later  When a MELSECNETH H board incompatible with the  MELSECNET H Extended mode is used  the system does not operate  normally    When connecting a QnA or A series MELSECNET 10 network module  use  it in the MELSECNET 10 mode    If used in any other mode  the system does not operate normally    Set a transmission speed matched with that of the network    When an incorrect transmission speed is set  the system does not operate  normally     7 PARAMETER SETTINGS       MELSEC    7 2 Network Settings    7 2 1 Network No     7 2 2 Station No     These are the parameters used to build the MELSECNET H network   The MELSECNET H board   s network No   station No   control station normal station  setting and group No  are set     Set the Network No  of the network which the MELSECNET H board is connected to   To set the network No  set it in the  Board Information  screen in the MNETH utility      1  Valid setting range  1 to 239     2  Caution     a  Set the same network No  to all of the devices connected to the same  network        Network Network    CPU  QJ71 CPU   QJ71  QJ71  1Mp2 1Ns3   1Ns4    0 1       Set the station No  of the MELSECNET H board   Set the station No  in the  Board Information  screen of the MNETH utility      1  E
127. atus of  host    Data link status of  host    Baton pass status of  each station    Data link status of  each station    Baton pass status of  each station   per station number     Data link status of  each station   per station number     Indicates the baton pass status of the host    It is in a status that the cyclic transmission and  transient transmission can be performed when it is  normal     Indicates the data link status  cyclic transmission  status  of the host     Indicates the baton pass status of each station   including the host     Reserved stations and stations having numbers  higher than the maximum station number are not  included    This device turns off when SW70 to 73 are all  0      Indicates the data link  cyclic transmission  status of    each station  including the host     Reserved stations and stations having numbers  higher than the maximum stations number are not  included    This device turns off when SW74 to 77 are all  0    Stores the baton pass status of each station   including the host      b13 b12 b4 b3 b1 bO  14   13 5   4 2 1    30   29 21   20 18   17  46   45 37   36 34   33  62   61 53   52 50   49    Numbers 1 to 64 in the table denote station numbers                                                  Stores the data link  cyclic transmission  status of    each station   Including the host     b4  5   4 2    b3 b1       21   20  37   36 34  53   52 50    Numbers 1 to 64 in the table denote station numbers     18                          
128. bilit          Backup and Color Dateand  Default  Restore C    Management Time Programs    hAee     Game Indexing Internet  Controllers Options Options    Offline Files Penand People Near Performance  Input Devices Me Informatio      2z EB     amp     Printers Problem Programs Network and  Reports a    and Features Sharing Ce       8   a    Speech Sync Center System  Recogniti      u  amp      Welcome Windows Windows  Center Anytim    CardSpace    azp  Se By    Windows Windows Windows  Sidebar    SideShow Update           To next page     App   15    1  Select  Start     Control Panel      2  Select  Classic View      3  Select  Administrative Tools      App   15    APPENDIX        From preceding page   x      Name Date modified   11 2 2006 9 54 PM  11 2 2006 9 53 PM  11 2 2006 9 54 PM  9 4 2007 11 45 AM  11 2 2006 9 54 PM  11 2 2006 9 56 PM  11 2 2006 9 53 PM    E Computer Management   F Data Sources  ODBC    Fl Event Viewer    B Documents  E   Pictures    B Music     Internet Information Services  US  Manager  More    fk iSCSI Initiator  Fades   h Local Security Policy    fxg  Memory Diagnostics Tool      Print Management 11 2 2006 9 55 PM  Y   Reliability and Performance Monitor 11 2 2006 9 53 PM     ah Services 11 2 2006 9 53 PM   jl System Configuration 11 2 2006 9 53 PM    Task Scheduler 11 2 2006 9 54 PM  d   Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 11 2 2006 9 53 PM    Public  Computer     Network  Bi Control Panel  y Administrative Tools    EJ AutoPlay  W Backup and R
129. ccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeceaeeeeeneeseaeeseaeeseaeeeseneeseeeeeneessnees 6  1  6 2  MSTA AU ON  3 3  24 Ken   ya let E a b  p   scoping ts tae isla tel Beds AER eae tase saad tat tthe tas A ct ates  RR D   d  z  6  2  6 2 1 Precautions when Nandling            ccccecceeceseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseaeeeateneseneeeaes 6  2  6 2 2 Installation environment              cccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeneeseaeeceaeeeceeessaaeeseaeeseaeescaeeeseceeseaeesenessseesieeess 6  2  6 3 Names of Each Part and Their Settings    ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeseaeseaeeeaeseaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeas 6  3  6 4 Cable  COnMSCuOm esc i oe E en ata E eee AT   diL oe ee rete Apa Soe Ce eed ees    6  6  6 4 1 Optical loop System            cecccceecceeecceeeceeseeeeeeneeeeaeeecaeeeeaaeeseaeeseaeeecaeeeeaaeeseaeseaeeseaeeesaeeeecaeeseneeeeessaeeess 6  8  6 4 2    Coaxial buS systems  4  40ch A Gunek RA na kn ku   a wenn d  e WEL   ade eee deena eels 6 10  6 4 3 Connecting the connector for the Coaxial cable         ee eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeseeteeteesieetieesieetieetaee 6 15  6 4 4 External power supply Cable wiring                 ui kk kek   keke     k  k kk kk kK    A KAK K  k KA 6 19  6 5 Standalone Check of the MELSECNET H Board  Offline TesStS                iiiiiEEkree 6 21  65 1  SelflOOPDACK 1SSE r canada ia kan  neue a a n B   den  E   a a  av bid  n an  n   e b   d     n 6 22  6 5 2  lnternal Sel   l    opBack te St   i  Jai ba
130. ce    C Network No  1    Request  destination   b  Multiple network system  two networks  Set the routing parameters only for the request source station   The route for reaching the request destination  network number 2  must be set  for the request source station     Request  source                                                                Relay station       Network No  2            Network No                                           destination                      Request             c  Multiple network system  three networks  Set the routing parameters for the request source and the relay stations   The route for reaching the request destination  network number 3  must be set  for the request source   The route for reaching the request destination  network number 3  must be set  for relay station 1    The route for reaching the request source  network number 1  must be set  for relay station 2      r   Esel    Se all GER    Relay station 1  Relay station 2     Network No  1 os   Network No  2 a oe m Network No  3     d  Multiple network system  four networks   Set the routing parameters for the request source station and the relay stations   The route for reaching the request destination  network number 4  must be set  for the request source station    The route for reaching the request destination  network number 4  must be set for  relay station 1   the relay station that is closest to the request source     The route for reaching the request source  network numb
131. ce data is not ensured even if secured   data handling is specified with the control station parameter     Personal computer MELSECNETI H board             Direct Access    Reading    User Refresh data  program storage area     gt   Writing    Watch Dog Timer Monitoring Displays the current value for the watchdog timer s monitoring time and inputs the setting  Time Setting value   Setting Range  1 to 32767  Default  250     Transient Timeout Monitoring Displays the current value for the transient time out monitoring time and inputs the setting  Time Setting value   Setting Range  1 to 360  Default  15                                       gt 1  Data consistency function prevents 2 word  32 bits  link data  e g  current value of a positioning module  from being  divided into two 1 word  16bits  data  old and new data  by certain cyclic transmission timing     2  The specified interval value changes the delay time  which is duration from when link device data arrive at the refresh  data storage area on the MELSECNET H board until they are read out into the user program   Refer to POINT      9 UTILITY OPERATIONS       MELSEC     1  Relation between link refresh interval value and delay time in data reading  The maximum delay time  Tomax  from when link device data arrive at the  refresh data storage area on the MELSECNET H board until they are read out  into the user program can be obtained from the following formula     Maximum delay time  Tomax    Tup    n 1  x TLs  Tup   Inte
132. cess to the Link Devices              ll  ikEkk kaka kaka k A kk AA KAKA AA ANA AWA HAAA AKA HAAA 12  1  12 2 Low Speed Cyclic Transmission Function           c cceccceceseceeeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseaeseneeeaeeeneeaes 12  2  12271 Send range SOUINGS 3 5 cet ese tenet tea eet Let te ae de es ee et ie ee ee Let kK 12  3  12  2 2  SOMO UDI     SEE n   a te eA ee A A K   E KE  ek E 12  4  12523 Stan Ui ees ete EE Adena ea ak ke ae te eae EA e e K   a EE    12  7  12 3 Transient Transmission FUNCTION            cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeseaseaeenaeeeas 12  9  123 4 Communication TUNCtON        i ai ne lati a neal ec el eal ec el qv Ba b  k wak    A 12 10  1232 ROUTING TUNCHON Sister a A A dir ir   d  ra   i A d   G  n        12 13  12 3 3  Group TUNCHON mnia li S   T  y r a V  NA KE H  TAN REVE edie ee eee ee 12 21  123 4  SENDRECV UNGH x   a   5an hak anak kk   k   5y ak EME ebu kk R   al xr aka ku yena ra   xaka kad   S aa E A    12 22  12 4 Multiplex Transmission Function  Optical Loop System             Eiiii EEE kk kk k k   12 25    13 ERROR CODE 13  1to13  2    14 TROUBLESHOOTING 14  1 to 14 26  14 1 When Performing Troubleshooting   0 0    cceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeas 14  1  14 2 Cause Determination Methods by Type of Trouble 0 0    eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeatesas 14  2  14 3 Flowchart to Use when MELSECNET H Board did n
133. cessary to set the routing to the Transfer to because the host  is on the same network as the destination transfer  3   However  it is  necessary to set the Transfer from network number  1  as the Transfer  to network number and to designate the relay station  2Mp1  and the  relay network number  2  to the relay station in order to trace a route  back to the request source     Routing parameter setting          Transfer      The setting is required  t Intermediate Intermediate  9 network No    station No  only for the transfer to  network No  network No   3    3 1 4                Request    source a  Network No  1        Hr      1Ns6 1Ns5 1Ns4 2Me1  Routing parameter setting vA          1Mp1 1Ns2 3Ns2    B               Network No  3    E    2Ns4 3Ns5 3Ns4 3Ns3  Request    destination  Routing parameter setting                                       Network No  2       2Ns2 2Ns3  Transfer    intermediate  Intermediate Transfer intermediate Intermediate    network No    station No     to  network No     1 2 1    to  network No     3    network No    station No                Stations for which the  routing parameters are set      1  The bridge function refers to sending data via an adjacent network     12 14 12 14    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       12 15    MELSEC     2  Routing parameter settings     a      b     Setting screen   A maximum of 64  Transfer to Network No   can be set on the  Routing  Parameter Setting  of the MNETH utility    Note that the same Transfer to netwo
134. ckage    b  64 bit version operating system    Communication Support Software Tool  GX Developer  and GT Designer2  cannot be operated simultaneously in a 64 bit version operating system     App   23 App   23    APPENDIX MELSEC       Appendix 7 Checking Serial Number and Function Version    This section explains how to check serial number  the function version and ROM  version of the MELSECNET H board and the SWODNC MNETH B version      1  Checking serial number  function version  and ROM version of the  MELSECNET H board     a  Checking serial number and function version  The function version of the MELSECNET H board can be checked at     Serial  section as shown below     KK KK KK k k k k k k       D     Serial No  Function version                                   b  Checking ROM version  The ROM version of the MELSECNET H board is shown on  Board list  tab    in the MNETH utility     n xi    Board list   Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory 1 0 Test   Target KIRI       m Board List    Channel No  Board Name IRQ No  Port Memory 120 Port Version    TE EE Ei REN Em El  E EEE Mi SERR EEE ma  TER     aT EEE             Channel No  Setting  Device Monitor Exit Help          App   24 App   24    APPENDIX MELSEC        2  Checking the SWODNC MNETH B version  The SWODNC MNETH B version is shown on  Version  tab in the MNETH utility     aos  4 gt     Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory 1 0 Test  Target   Driver 
135. ction    e Be sure to fix communication cables connecting to the board by placing them in the duct or  clamping them    Cables not placed in the duct or without clamping may be hang freely and accidentally pulled   which may cause damage to the board or cable  or malfunction due to bad cable contacts    e When removing the cable from the board  do not pull the cable    Pulling the cable that is still connected to the board may cause damage to the board or cable  or  malfunction due to bad cable contacts    e Prevent foreign matter such as chips or wiring debris from getting on the board    Failure to do so can result in fire  breakdowns or malfunction    e Verify the rated voltage and pin assignment of the product and connect the external power  supply cable properly    Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating  imperfect cable crimping or faulty  wiring may cause a fire or failure    e Use a specified tool for crimping of the cable and contacting pin  Imperfect crimping may cause  malfunction    e Verify the pin assignment and fully insert the crimped contacting pin into the connector   Imperfect insertion may cause failure or malfunction    e Insert the wired external power supply cable into the external power supply cable connector until  a click is heard  Imperfect insertion may cause failure or malfunction    e Keep the external power supply cable away from the main circuit cable  power cables and or  load cables connected to other than programmable contr
136. ction 9 1   ct      Section 15 2    Mar   2007   SH NA  080128 K  Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Section 2 2 4  Section 2 5   Section 6 4 1  Section 6 4 2  Section 8 1 1  Section 8 1 2  Section 10 1 2   Section 10 2  Section 11 2  Section 11 6  Section 11 8  Section 15 4 5    Addition    Section 11 3 5  Section 11 3 6  Section 11 7    Oct   2007   SH NA  080128 L  Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Section 1 2  Section 1 3  Section 2 5   Chapter 5  Section 8 1 1  Section 8 3  Section 9 1  Chapter 14   Section 15 2  Section 15 3 1  Section 8 1 2 changed to Section 8 1 3    Addition    Section 8 1 2  Appendix 5         The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover     Print Date    Manual Number  Jan   2008  SH NA  080128 M    Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Section 2 5  Section 6 5 1   Section 6 5 2  Section 6 5 3  Section 6 6 1  Section 6 6 2  Section 8 1 1   Section 8 1 3  Section 10 1 2  Section 10 2  Section 11 6  Section 11 7    May  2008   SH NA  080128 N Model addition  Q81BD J71LP21 25  SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  Precautions for Use  INTRODUCTION   Generic Terms and Abbreviations  Product List  Section 1 2   Section 1 3  Section 2 1  Section 2 5  Section 3 1  Section 3 2   Section 6 3  Section 6 4 1  Section 6 4 3  Section 6 5 1  Section 6 5 2   Section 6 5 3  Section 6 6 1  Section 6 6 2  Section 8 1 1  Section 8 1 3   Section 8 2  Section 8 3  Section 9 1  Section 9 1 1  Section 9 2 2   Section 9 2 6  Section 10 1 2  Section 11 3  Section 15 2  Section 15
137. d     a      b     Always use a double shielded coaxial cable  MITSUBISHI CABLE   5C 2V   CCY  for the coaxial cables Q80BD J71BR11  Ground the double shielded  coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground    Refer to  1  for the grounding of the shield     Shield   here    Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable     5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE  MELSEC        3  Grounding cables with a cable clamp  Ground the shield of the external wiring cable to the control panel with the  AD75CK cable clamp  Mitsubishi   Ground the shield within 20 to 30cm from the    module        MELSECNET H board      Inside the control panel  B  H  l 20 to 30cm  Go  j Li    For details on the AD75CK  refer to the following   e AD75CK type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual                               5 1 4 Ferrite core    Ferrite core is effective for reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz frequency    band   It is recommended to install a ferrite core if a shield cable extended out of the control    panel does not provide sufficient shielding effects   Install a ferrite core to the cable in the position immediately before the cable is  extended out of the control panel  If the installation position is not appropriate  the    ferrite core will not produce any effect    Ferrite core used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi  TDK ZCAT3035 1330     5 1 5 Noise filter  power supply line filter     Noise filter is effective for reducing conducted noise in the 10MHz or l
138. d as the control station  However  only 1 station can be assigned as the control  station per system                                                  Station No  1 Station No  2 Station No  32   control station   normal station   normal station   Personal  gt   gt   computer  amp    QCPU  QJ71     QCPU  QJ71  2 BR11  2 BR11  D D  z z  O O  a a  Coaxial cable E   a  Terminal resistor Terminal resister  A6RCON R75 A6RCON R75    2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  MELSEC       2 2 3 Setting items    In a single network system  the items which need to be set in the case that the  MELSECNET H board is used as the control station or normal station are as follows   MELSECNETHH board settings are set by the MNETH Utility     Setting item Control station   Normal station  Channel setting ae Section 9 2 2  O  x     H    Network No     Station No     Section 9 2 3    Control station  Normal station    Mode Setting    Routing parameter setting is  e  Section 9 2 4  B  W setting ies ioe    Soren  X Y setin HEE TER    g o Section 9 2 5       parameter        Reserved station setting  setting  Supplementary setting    Opposite party setting    Section 9 2 10   Logical station No   ection    Section 9 2 11    O  Setting necessary A  Set as necessary X  Setting unnecessary    Driver setting    2 2 4 Usable device ranges    The MELSECNET H board can be used within the following device ranges for the  following devices on the MELSECNET H board     Usablerange   _  Z yi j j O    Ou to 3FFFu The function exp
139. data link   An unexpected value is input to a specific link device   B  W  X  Y    Data cannot be written or read even though device  access has been performed using communication  functions with the user program     Communication is occasionally disabled while running the    user program   The system went down  the blue screen  or a system  reset has been executed in the Operating Systems     Refer to the flowchart in 14 4     Refer to the flowchart in 14 5     The external power supply function does not work properly  Refer to the flowchart in 14 6     The personal computer has slowed down    1  Operations with the mouse or keyboard are slow   2  Operations of other applications are slow    3  The CPU usage is high    4  Operations by the sound function are unstable     The software is not normally installed   The setup screen remains even after selecting to restart the  system at the completion of the utility installation     Uninstallation is not executed normally    Although the message  SWODNC MNETH B has been  successfully uninstalled from your machine  is displayed on  the screen  the uninstallation is not complete     14 2    Refer to Section 14 8     1  Check if the display settings on the  Device  Manager  or other relevant functions are  correct  and install an appropriate display driver   Or update the Windows   operating system    2  Check the precautions in Section 8 1  2   and  perform the operations described in Section  8 1 1  3     1  Logon as a user with a
140. designating a network module that is close to the request source of the  same programmable controller    1Mp1    Pa  fo   a       1Ns2          Host       Network No  1  etwork No 1Ns3       Host       1Ns4    Host       2Mp1    Host    Host       Network No  2  2Ns2      1      Host       2Ns3       3Mr1       Network No  3  3Ns2       3Ns3       O   O   O  O O               O O OJO O O  GLOTTOLOG                                        aMail O  6S    ST   6 To lT o lT o To To To T         8Ns2    OT O   O J  O TO T OT OT OT OT O T          Host  Network No  8 8N3 6   6S lT olo To ol olo olol        Host  8Ns4   O   O IO   O   T O  O TO T O   O   O T                Host  OMet   6J Ol 6S J  OO a   aol om  OO                Host              Host  Network No 9  9Ns2   x  O x   x   O  O   OJ O   OJ Ol         O  o   O        Host  9Ns3 O   O O   O   eeeee    O   O            Hest  pita des 1M  1 1Ns211Ns3 1Ns4l2M  1 2Ns22Ns3 3M  13Ns2 3Ns3         8M  1 8Ns2 8Ns3 8Ns4 9M  1l9Ns2  9Ns3  Request Network Network Network      Network Network  destination  source  No  1 No  2 No  3 No  8 No  9                                                                12 12    12 12    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       MELSEC    12 3 2 Routing function    12 13    The routing function is used to execute transient transmissions to stations having other  network numbers in a multiple network system   In order to execute the routing function  it is necessary to set the  routing parameters     to associ
141. destination  to the request source   Avoid path C when setting the return path     Request  destination     2  When data is sent to a remote network by transient transmission using the  routing parameters  data is transferred through many networks  thus  the  amount of transmission data and the number of transmissions may affect the  entire system    For example  in network No  2 to 5 in the figure above  the link scan time may  become temporarily longer and there may be delays in the transient  transmission of the host because of the transient transmissions from other  networks    When using the routing parameters  design the transient transmission by  considering the entire system     When multiple network systems are connected with the routing function  the  request source can send requests to destinations in up to eight network  systems  the maximum number of relay stations is seven stations         12 17 12 17       12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC     4  Calculation of transmission delay time  The processing time of the transient transmission instruction to access a station  on other network in a multiple network system can be obtained by adding the  following transmission delay factors      Routing transmission delay time     processing time from request source to relay station        processing time from relay station to request destination         a  Processing time from request source to relay station  This is the transmission delay time from the request source  the
142. ding MELSECNET H network system  reference manual  PLC to PLC network   for details       Block guarantee of cyclic data per station  Refer to Section 11 2 1 Block guarantee  of cyclic data per station for details     11 3    11 PROGRAMMIN    k     MELSEC       11 2 1 Block guarantee of cyclic data per station    By enabling the parameter settings shown below  handshaking for the cyclic data is  performed between the PC and the MELSECNET H board and then the network is  refreshed    Through the cyclic data handshaking  the link data block is guaranteed for each station   to prevent link data separation per station   1     As shown below  set the send and receive parameters as needed    The MELSECNET H board can be set in the MNETH utility s  Common Parameter  Setting  Supplementary Settings   screen only when it is the control station   It is not  necessary to set it if the board is a normal station      I  Secured data send    IF    Secured data receive    By selecting both  Secured data send  and  Secured data receive   an interlock for the  link data between the stations to be set becomes unnecessary     j MELSECNET H board and  PC and CPU module device W Network module LW    Updated portion  of refresh A    Station number 1       Updated portion Station number 2  of refresh B  Host     Stati ber 3  Updated portion oe NURSE    f refresh C  S  TOTES Station number 4          The block guarantee per station applies only to the refresh processing  To use the  direct access of
143. dministrator authority  and execute the uninstallation    2  Check if the display settings on the  Device  Manager  or other relevant functions are  correct  and install an appropriate display  driver    Or update the Windows   operating system    3  Check the precautions in Section 8 2  1   and  perform the operations described in Section  8 2  4         14 2    14 TROUBLESHOOTING       The driver is not normally installed    A    mark is displayed next to the  PCI MELSECNET H  Controller  item in the Windows   Device Manager  screen     MELSEC    Error detail Cause determination method Action    1  Check installed status of the MELSECNET H  board    2  Reinstall the utility    3  When the same error occurs in another personal  computer  replace the MELSECNET H board    If any of the above actions do not solve the error    consult with dealer regarding the problem        An error message is displayed in utility    1   It failed to read the utility file version  is displayed    It failed to read the driver package version  is  displayed     It is failed to write the board setting data  is  displayed    It is failed to write the target setting data  is  displayed     Logon as a user with administrator authority and  execute utility    Refer to POINT in Section 9 1   or reinstall the  operating system        The password is requested on the User Account Control  screen when the utility is activated    lt Using Windows Vista    Windows Server   2008 gt        i    6 An unidentif
144. e MNETH utility s screen explanations and operation methods   Use of the MNETH utility is explained here using the screen explanations when the  Q80BD J71LP21 25 and Windows   98 are installed     9 2 1 Operating procedure    This section explains the MNETH utility s operating procedure        Connect the personal computer to the MELSECNET H or        a  e   Refer to Section 6 1   MELSECNET 10                         Carry out settings with the MNETH utility     Check the  Board List  screen for the list of MELSECNET H  boards installed in the personal computer            peee Refer to Section 9 2 2             Set the master station information and each setting item in    the  Board information  screen  j Bana Refer to Section 9 2 3            If the MELSECNET H board is being used as a control  station  set the common parameters in the  Common  Parameters setting  screen     LR Refer to Section 9 2 5             If routing parameters are necessary  set them in the  Routing  Parameters setting  screen     Check the local station line status in the  Loop Monitor   screen  i    To check the status of each station  check the  Each sta  j  status  screen  HEK ene i Refer to Section 9 2 7      eri er  n keke   Refer to Section 9 2 4           Read Aa Refer to Section 9 2 6                    To check the error history  check the  Error history monitor     screen  i R   ote Refer to Section 9 2 8           If you are diagnosing the dual port memory and I O ports  used by the MELSE
145. e kept in mind when performing  troubleshooting      1  Visual check    Check the following points  14   a  Movement of the external device  status when stopped or during operation     b        b  On off status of power supply   c  Wiring condition  cable    d     d  LED display status  power supply display LED     After checking  a  through  d   connect the external device and check the  operation of the user program      2  Confirming the error    Examine how the error status changes by the following operation    a  Change the input status and check if the change can be read correctly using  the test program      b  Repeat on off of output and check if the status of the external device  changes accordingly      3  Narrowing the range  Based on the steps  1  and  2  above  deduce the range of error location as one  of the following      a  PC side or external device side   b  PC main body or board    c  Cable    d  User program    14 1 14 1    14    14 TROUBLESHOOTING       MELSEC    14 2 Cause Determination Methods by Type of Trouble    4    2  a    When an error occurs  use the table below to find the section that describes an  appropriate method to determine the cause     Error detail Cause determination method Action  MELSECNET H board did not operate normally upon startup    Refer to the flowchart in 14 3     Data link is not achieved after the MELSECNET H board and    control station as well as other normal stations were  connected   An error occurred while conducting 
146. eater module  models A6BR10 or A6BR10 DC   use  the station to station cable length for  10 to 33  stations  regardless of  the number of stations connected or the number of repeater modules      b  Cable installation precautions    1     2     Install the coaxial cables at least 100 mm  3 94 in   away from other   power cables and control cables    Consider to use double shielded coaxial cables in locations where   there is excessive noise    Double shielded coaxial cable  Mitsubishi Cable      5C 2V CCY    qs                                                                                      Ground        gt       5C 2V connector plug can be applied to double shielded coaxial cable   Connect the plug to the coaxial cable inside the double shielded  coaxial cable    Ground the shielded section  external part of the double shielded  coaxial cable  as shown above     6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION          MELSEC     c  When connecting a coaxial cable  the following restrictions on the bending  radius must be observed     Allowable bending radius Connector  Cable type  r MET DEN  in    A  mm  in     aa   2V 23   2s  0 91    91   BETA 2V 55  2 17   30  1 18     5C FB_   FB     d  Donot pull any of the connected coaxial cables     This may cause a faulty contact and cable disconnection  or damage the  Q80BD J71BR11     e  In the coaxial bus type network system be sure to connect terminal  resistors in both end terminals in the network      f  There is a p
147. eesaeeeaeeeeeeaneas 2  1  w  le ND Yaaa Lr A r r Dr Kn 2  3   2 2 1 Optical loop system             EEEEE kk kek kre kk k kk kk kk kk KAKA KAKA KAKA KA KA KK KA KK KA kK KA A KAK A KAK AKA KA KA KA KA KA RA HHR kk 2  3   2a A Coaxial  DUS SYSIOM    A 2c k   e ne ie in i ei ee n ie ie W   Ke 2  3   22 9  G  N TO MOINS  s   yan Ke y        eIn   a ts QAWE  R   eerie HK BENA KAN BEN     B  RA el iad xe D  S Kenek KA 2  4   2 24 Usable device rall0 685  ca  4c xaxy  yb amp    2 i   22a lak   a ks  k aile a    yda c  e a   ke e   kat   ea 2  4  2 3 Multiple Network System             lllllEk keka kak   ka KAKA KAKA KAKA AA AKA KAKA AA HAA WAK AA AA HAWA K AKA AWA AR 2  5   PA ARD sana le N DD _w eozww gmnognmnnmn rene 2  5   Z02 O0    DON NO TS oie cece a n KE KK ae ae    ereke a keke n   ame ey an en   DRA 2  6   A ASM ace Dl DD Dr rd r teens 2  6  2 4 If used in a Multiple CPU System or Redundant CPU System             iiiiiiEE kk kk kk k   2  7  2 5 Operating  EnV  TOnI TEN   sriain ienaa aa y   xe d  k dk aa w   d  k Ve d  e i a ia A    kaw   nak   2  8  3 1 General Specifications 3 iiy 5   k   53x 2xk daka dka kal ks lkap dl ya kak K   na ks kk xua keki    ku kk ap Ka EATR KU wu   z   i Ke We   ka kake daka Re AR And 3  1  3 2 Performance Specif  CatiornS                    u  Ekkk keka keke keke keka kek kk KK AKA AKA KAKA KA KAKA KA KA KA KA KA KA KA KA HAAA 3  2  3 3 Optical Fiber Cable Specification arasa una dl dd Wl kill e ki LE dk an L   KAL ada kek k      ek        Se
148. effective shielding of  personal computer emitted electromagnetic noise      1  Control panel     a    b      c      d    e     Use a conductive control panel     Mask off the area used for grounding when securing the top or bottom plate  to the control panel using bolts     To ensure electrical contact between the inner plate and the control panel   mask off the bolt installation areas of an inner plate so that conductivity can  be ensured in the largest possible area     Ground the control panel with a thick ground cable so that low impedance  can be ensured even at high frequencies     Keep the diameter of the holes on the control panel to 10cm or less  If the  diameter is larger than 10cm  electromagnetic wave may be emitted  In  addition  because electromagnetic wave leaks through a clearance  between the control panel and its door  reduce the clearance as much as  possible  Use of EMI gaskets  sealing the clearance  can suppress  undesired radiated emissions     The tests by Mitsubishi were conducted using a control panel having the damping  characteristics of 37dB  maximum  and 30dB  average   measured at 3m distance   30 to 300MHz       2  Wiring power and ground cables  The power supply cable and ground cable for a personal computer should be laid  out as follows      a      b     Provide a ground point to the control panel near the power supply module   Ground the LG and FG terminals of the power supply module to the ground  point with the thickest and shortest grou
149. electric field is radiated to  e 80 to 1000MHz  10V m   electromagnetic field the product    1 4 to 2 0GHz  3V m   immunity   1   2 0 to 2 7GHz  1V m   EN61000 4 4 B nee     AC DC power  I O power  and   Fast transient burst Burst noise is applied to power   ac 119  unshielded  lines  2kV   immunity   i lines and signal lines    DC I O  analog  and communication lines  1kV      8kV Air discharge    4kV Contact discharge         AC power  AC I O power  and  EN61131 2   AC I O  unshielded  lines  2kV CM  1kV DM  2007 EN61000 4 5 Lightning surge is applied to  e DC power and DC I O power lines   Surge immunity   i power lines and signal lines  0 5kV CM  0 5kV DM    DC I O  AC I O  shielded   analog   communication  1kV CM    EN61000 4 6 High frequency noise is applied  0 15 to 80MHz  80  AM modulation  1kHz   Conducted RF immunity  1   to power lines and signal lines   10Vrms    EN61000 4 8 The product is immersed in the  Power frequency magnetic  magnetic field of an induction  50Hz 60Hz  30A m  field immunity  1 coil       0   0 5 period  starting at zero crossing  Power voltage is momentarily  e 0   250 300 period  50 60Hz   interrupted    40   10 12 period  50 60Hz    e 70   25 30 period  50 60Hz      1  The tests were conducted installed in a control panel     EN61000 4 11  Voltage dips and  interruption immunity   1       5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE       MELSEC    5 1 2 Installation in a control panel    The installation in the control board ensures safety as well as 
150. em  Connect IN and OUT of network modules  Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD   J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G or Q80BD   J71LP21GE with an optical fiber cable     Station to Station to  execute test be tested       Optical fiber cable     b  Coaxial bus system  Connect network modules or Q80BD J71BR11 with a coaxial cable     Station to Station to  execute test be tested               Station  No  n    Station  No  n 1             Side    Side       Coaxial cable    Terminal Terminal  resistor resistor    6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION       MELSEC    Before conducting the station to station test when three or more stations are  connected by the coaxial bus system  any stations that are not tested should be  switched to offline or powered off     Station to Station to Offline or  execute test be tested powered off                      T     2  Test mode settings    In the mode settings in the MNETH utility s  Board Information  screen  set the  Station No  n  Station No  n   1 stations  respective  Test between master  station  and  Test between slave station  settings              Mode     Test between master station       Forward loop test as    pasena loop test i  est between master station U  Test between slave station Setting    p  Internal self loopback test  Hw test        3  Start of inter station test  Set the mode setting on  Test between master station  or  Test between slave    station  and click the   Board Set   button     This operat
151. ems Check firewall status   Allow program through Windows Firewall  User Accounts and Family   ee wy oer    View amount of RAM and processor speed   Ches  EP Allow remote access   See the name ofthis comp    p Windows Update    lows Experience Index  j Device Manager       Appearance and  Personalization    Clock  Language  and Region                            Power Options   Dia Backup and Restore   By  Windows Anytime Upgrade   NSA Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7  Administrative Tools  Free up disk space Defragment your hard drive   ere EEI 4  Set the slide bar  Never notify  and click the  OK   Choose when to be notified about changes to your computer y  en e    Program  try to install software or make changes to   my computer       Imake changesto Windows settings      Not recommended  Choose this onyif you need to  fre programs thetarenot cetfid for Windows   o  Secnusethey do nat suppor User Account Corto    Nevernotify             l     Setting completion     App   14 App   14    APPENDIX        2  Allowing the warning message without showing it    Internet   amp  internet Explorer     ay E mail  EL  Windows Mail      l Welcome Center    R   gt a Backup Status and Configuration  ea       E      Windows Media Player    RB Small Business Resources    ay Windows Fax and Scan  g Windows Meeting Space    i Windows Photo Gallery       MELSEC    The following shows a procedure for allowing a warning message without    showing it     Documents  Pictures   Mu
152. ent of data communication error  between the PC and programmable controller CPU in use        9 3 9 Switching the display form    Switches the device monitoring display to the selected form   The batch monitoring and 16 point entry monitor have different sets of selectable  menus  respectively      1  Selecting the menu  Select  Display switch     Word  bit  device  from the menu bar     9 UTILITY OPERATIONS MELSEC       9 3 10 Numeric value input pad    A numeric value input pad is available for setting device values and other numeric  parameters  To display the numeric value input pad  select  Options     Numerical pad   from the menu bar     1  Click inside the numeric value input field     Data Changing  x     Device W 0000    CHEX     DEC fo N    Cancel               2  The numeric value input pad is displayed  Use the buttons to enter a desired value     and then click the button              Numerical Pad x     i  RAAE  E EE EI Ei  EEE TIR  BEIE    3  The value is entered in the system     Device Yy 0000       C HEX   DEC E         ome         9 UTILITY OPERATIONS       MELSEC    9 3 11 Other operations    Double clicking the device number on the screen while monitoring changes data in  word device and turns on off the bit device      1  Word device    The following explains how to change the word device    Only when the display form is 16 bit      1  Double click the number of the word device to be changed        2  As the following dialog box is displayed  set a desi
153. er   System cryptography  Use FIPS compliant algorithms for encryption  hashing  and signing  System objects  Require case insensitivity for non Windows subsystems   System objects  Strengthen default permissions of internal system objects  e g  Symbolic Links   System settings  Optional subsystems   System settings  Use Certificate Rules on Windows Executables for Software Restriction Policies  User Account Control  Admin Approval Mode for the Built in Administrator account    Security Setting E  Negotiate signing  No minimum   No minimum  Disabled   Disabled   Enabled   Disabled   Not Defined  Disabled   Enabled   Enabled   Posix   Disabled   Disabled    User Account Control  Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for consent    User Account Control  Behavior of the elevation prompt for standard users  User Account Control  Detect application installations and prompt for elevation   User Account Controk Only elevate executables that are signed and validated   User Account Control  Only elevate UlAccess applications that are installed in secure locations  User Account Controk Run all administrators in Admin Approval Mode   User Account Control  Switch to the secure desktop when prompting for elevation   User Account Control  Virtualize file and registry write failures to per user locations    Prompt for credentials    Enabled  Disabled  Enabled  Enabled  Enabled  Enabled X    T                                        App   17    L   
154. er 1  must be set for relay  station 2   the relay station that is closest to the request destination    The routes for reaching the request destination  network 4  and the request  source  network number 1  must be set for relay station 3   relay station other  than 1  and 2       Request  source Relay station 3  Relay station 2       Relay station 1         Network No  1 m No  253 P  Network No 3 J   Network No  4   DT  Request  destination                                                                                     Request  destination                                                                                                                                                                            12 16 12 16    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC        1  When a network is connected in a loop as shown in the figure below  make  sure to set the routing parameters so that the same relay station is routed for  both the  route from request source to request designation  and the  route back  from request destination to request source     Do not set the destination and returning paths to circle the entire loop  The first  relay station in the return path from the request destination is determined by the  relay station in the forward path  thus  data cannot be transferred to a station  beyond that relay station and an error occurs     Request A indicates the path from the request source to the  source request destination     B and C indicate the path from the request 
155. ess frequency    Use of a noise filter can suppress noise    The installation precautions are described below      1  Do not bundle the cables on the input side and output side of the noise filter   If bundled  the output side noise will be induced into the filtered cable on the input    side     Input side Input side   power supply side   power supply side                  Induction             Filter                 Filter             Output side   device side     Output side   device side     Noise will be induced when the input Separately install the input and  and output cables are bundled  output cables     5 5    5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE  MELSEC        2  Ground the ground terminal of the noise filter to the ground point of the control  panel with the shortest ground wire possible  approximately 10cm      5 2 Requirements for Conformance to Low Voltage Directive  The MELSECNET H board is out of the requirement for conformance to the Low    Voltage Directive  since it does not use the power supply in the range of 50 to 1000V  AC and 75 to 1500V DC     6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION    This section explains the operating procedure up to the point the MELSECNET H  board is operated     6 1 Procedure Up to the Point of Operation    An outline of the procedure up to the point of MELSECNET H board operation is  explained below     C Start    When the PC is powered on  power off 
156. estore        Default Programs    Ease of Access Cente  1A Fonts    13 items       L    Local Security Policy    File Action View Help                               ors  d   Security Settings Name Description  i Account Policies Account Policies Password and account lockout policies   gt  T   Local Policies  Windows Firewall with Advanced Se we      Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec    rj windows Firewall with Adv    Windows Firewall with Advanced Security   gt  EZ   Public Key Policies foe Ke    Software Restriction Policies BAN ERIN      gt   amp  IP Security Policies on Local Compute      Software Restriction Policies  WP Security Policies on Local    Internet Protocol Security IPsec  Administratio       bi m    L     J             lt  lt  yo he Sa      Eile Action View Help             e  xel     Security Settings Name    Description  a pooner C   Audit Policy Audit Policy  Bih Local Policies    User Rights Assignment User Rights Assignment    Ea L Security Options Security Options   gt   E Public Key Policies demon Security Options     Software Restriction Policies   gt    amp  IP Security Policies on Local Compute                                     j   To next page     App   16    MELSEC    4  Select  Local Security Policy    REMARKS  When user account control is enabled the following  screen appears  Click the   Continue   or Yes  button    lt  Windows Vista    Windows Server   2008 gt                                lt  Windows   7 gt        User Account Control     
157. et 4   gt                 Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot       Own Station Information Routing Param  Setting      Network No  Group No  Sta No  Control   Normal Sta     1 gir o zil TI By  Control Sta  zi Routing Param Transfer      LED r  MNET H optical fiber  Board Set    RUN BG       8   MNG Common Param  Setting        S MNG Mode            SW E  D D T PASS  Driine auto recor  nection       hE       Taree Sree Common Param Transter   E e a  B  JEBENG J  fem  R  UNDER       UNDER  R  MNET H mode xl   aa 5 a kooi Reconnect    Select     Retum as control station x        Return as    control station  Return as normal station             SD  RD RD n    Return as control station be  F LOOP   A LOOP    Device Monitor                      When  Return as control station  is selected  the network stop time becomes  longer because the baton pass is stopped  but the common parameters can easily  be changed only by resetting the Board of the control station    If  Return as normal station  is selected  the network does not stop because the  control station returns to the network without stopping the baton pass    However  it is necessary to reset the CPUs of all the stations after changing the  common parameters of the control station while the network is in operation    If only the board resetting is performed  the MELSECNET H board  Control  station  detects the parameter mismatch error and disconnects it     8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE  MELSEC       8 INST
158. ettings are changed  automatically    For details of MELSECPowerManager  refer to  Appendix 11           Program Compatibility Assistant x      This program might not have installed correctly    If this program didn t install correctly  try reinstalling using settings that  are compatible with this version of Windows            Program  Setup Launcher  IB Publisher  InstallShield Software Corporation  Location  E  EnvMEL EnvMELENG SETUP EXE       Reinstall using recommended settings      This program installed correctly    Cancel                         If this screen is displayed during the installation or at  the installation completion  click  This program  installed correctly       If this screen is displayed when the installation is    aborted  click the button and close the    screen   Do not select  Reinstall using recommended settings    An incorrect module may be installed        8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE  MELSEC       Screens Procedure       Windows Security   Click  Install this driver software anyway         Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software     gt  Don t install this driver software  You should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software  for your device           V  See details                Window Sea OOOO Confirm the publisher is  MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC  Would eau lice to metal sis devie softeares CORPORATION   and click the   Install   button        Name  Publisher  MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORAT
159. etwork system which is used to connect multiple sequencer  modules and personal computers  and is equipped with functions and performance  realized in the MELSECNET 10 for general control of a production line    In the MELSECNETHH  there is a network system which includes an optical loop  system  communication rates  10 Mbps  25 Mbps  and a coaxial bus system   communications rate  10 Mbps   enabling large volume communications at high  speeds    Also  in order to improve the performance of the MELSECNET 10 network and achieve  upward compatibility  MELSECNET H supports the MELSECNET  H and  MELSECNET H Extended modes  high performance  high speed mode  and the  MELSECNET 10 Mode  function compatible and performance compatible mode      MELSECNET H mode Set this mode when all CPUs within the network are QCPUs     The maximum number of link points per station has been increased  MELSECNET H Extended  compared with the MELSECNET H mode     In excess of 2000 bytes  a maximum of 35840 bytes can be set     Set this mode when the system uses many link points per station        Personal Computer  MELSECNET H Board   Q80BD J71BR11     Personal Computer  MELSECNET H Board MELSECNET 10   Q80BD J71LP21 25  QCPU  1 x Mode QCPU                  GX Developer z            FEA  MELSECNET H    1    mika  PALE  FTL  B   Art  QCPU  QCPU    AnU          lo g  zz       li                                                                                                                    1  The mult
160. f  transients in 1 scan  setting   Refer to Section 12 3 1 for the  Maximum no  of transients in 1 scan  setting        12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       MELSEC     2  Transmission processing interval  The following system configuration example is used for subsequent explanations     Mp1 Ns2 Ns3 Ns4  control normal normal normal  station station station station                                          Ea     a  When  Transmit data of one station in 1 link scan    Fixed term cycle interval  setting  Maximum no  of transients  1   and  System times  Maximum no  of  transients  1   are set       F  z  g       Low speed cyclic  transmission    Low speed data   o Z  Low speed data    gt  z    Low speed data    gt   Low speed data   N                                                    s  i  d  i B  Mp1 sending 2     LW       9  a  j    i  j 5       g  Ns2 sending   2        a    3  j    j    Ns3 sending   2    Q  j 3  l 3  i g    5  A 3  Ns4 sending 2   i    3  j  j  j  uf  j  4  j  j          j j 1 j  Normal    Normal j Normal    Normal     link scan j link scan    link scan i link scan j    gt it  gt  lt   gt  lt  Pi   j       Transmission processing interval R  i    12 5 12 5    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC        b  When  Fixed term cycle interval  Maximum no  of transients  2   and   System times  Maximum no  of transients  2   are set    Ns Ns    Zz  i    Low speed cyclic  transmission    Low speed data    gt     Low speed data   N  Low speed data       Low speed data    gt 
161. fer to  1      E  Lor  Arver response enor has not oxsuned      A PCI bus error has not occurred     em up A PCI bus error has occurred     Connector for connecting optical fiber cable    1  The cable terminal is as shown below     f    Indicator LED          RD       Connector for      IN Reverse loop transmission    connecting          IN Forward loop reception    optical fiber cable          Optical fiber cable  connection connector       Jour Forward loop transmission    OUT Reverse loop reception             Connector for connecting coaxial cable    1  The cable terminal is as shown below     Connector for   connecting   coaxial cable  Coaxial cable  connection connector       6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC                         Use prohibited  Fixed to RP side                 DIP switch    Use prohibited  Fixed to OFF        The external power supply status is indicated     External power    supply indicator No external power supplied    LED External power supplied    Connector for connecting external power supply cable  The cable terminal assignment is as shown below     External power  With the board top facing u   a ee  ee TIS    supply cable kaza EW  connector CLASS2 ONLY                                                                 1  The jumper is provided for all of the Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  and the Q80BD J71LP21 25 and  Q80BD J71LP21G of the following serial No     Q80BD J71LP21 25  Serial No   Check the  Serial 
162. ffective setting range  The effective setting range differs depending on the type of network     e Optical loop systeme 1 to 64  e Coaxial bus systeme    1 to 32   2  Caution     a  Make settings so that the same station No  does not exist in more than one  place in the same network     7 2 3 Control station Normal station    Set the Control station   Normal station setting on the MELSECNET H board   Set the Control station   Normal station setting in the  Board Information  screen of the  MNETH utility     7 PARAMETER SETTINGS       MELSEC    7 2 4 Group No     This sets the MELSECNET H board s group No   Set the group No  setting in the  Board Information  screen of the MNETH utility      1  Valid setting range  0  No group setting  1 to 9  When in the MELSECNET 10 Mode  1 to 32  When in the MELSECNET H Mode and MELSECNET H Extended Mode     2  Cautions     a  Only one Group No  can be set for 1 station   _Group No  1 Group No  2       Personal CPU    computer    Ns2                            Persona  computer                   7 2 5 Mode setting    This sets the MELSECNET H board s operating mode     Selection item Content  Normal operation  return to system  is selected   Online  auto  reconnection   When the system is started up  data communications is started and automatic return to  system operations  etc  are carried out   Operation stop  disconnecting the station  is selected   Handshake and data communications with other stations is not done   The connection state 
163. for preventing static electricity   Always place the board in this bag when storing or transporting   Otherwise  failure or malfunctioning may result    e Take care that foreign objects such as chips or wiring debris do not get into the PC   This could result in fire  breakdowns or malfunctioning    e Do not dismantle or rebuild the board   This will result in failure  malfunctioning  injury or fire    e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system  before installing or removing the board   If power is not turned off  there is a risk of electric shock or damage to the product    e When disposing of the product  handle it as an industrial waste    e Do not drop the board or subject it to strong impact   This will result in failure or malfunctioning of the board        6 2 2 Installation environment    Refer to the instruction manual accompanying the PC module regarding installation of  the PC module in which the MELSECNET H board is mounted        6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION       MELSEC    6 3 Names of Each Part and Their Settings    The names of each part of the MELSECNET H board and their settings are explained  below      1  Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE  Q80BD J71BR11                                                                   Q80BD J71BR11 perl J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE     2  Q80BD J71LP21S 25                                        
164. fore touching the board   Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the board         Disposal Instructions     ZA CAUTION       e When disposing of this product  treat it as industrial waste     e CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT e     1  Mitsubishi programmable controller   the PRODUCT   shall be used in conditions           i  where any problem  fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT  if any  shall not lead to any major or  serious accident  and   ii  where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the  PRODUCT for the case of any problem  fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT     The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general   industries    MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED   TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT  WARRANTY  TORT    PRODUCT LIABILITY  FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO   PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION   NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS  PRECAUTIONS  OR WARNING   CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER  INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS  TECHNICAL   BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT      Prohibited Application     Prohibited Applications include  but not limited to  the use of the PRODUCT in    e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies  and or any other  cases in which the pub
165. g other Optional DOA    ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeteeeseaeteneteataes 14 21  14 6 When external power supply function does not work Properly            c cceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 14 22  14 7 Measures for WDT error OCCUITENCE              ccceececeneceeeeeeeeeteceeeaeeceaeeecaeeeteneesaeeseaeescaeessseeseaeesseesaees 14 23  14 8 Measures for Slow PC OperatiOn             ccccccccecceeeeeceeceeeceeeeceeseneeceaeeeeaeecseaeeseaeescaeeecaeeesceessaeeesaeenaees 14 24  14 9 Information Needed when Calling with Inquiry                LLLu Ek kk kek   kk kek kek kK RR 14 25  Appendix 1 Channel No  Assignment Method                 ii kk ake kek   kk kk a kK k A KAKA KRA App  1  Appendix 2 Procedures for Replacing Boards                  cccscceeeceeeeceeeeseeceaeeeeaeeeeaeeesneeseaeeteaeesceeeseneessaetans App  3  Appendix 3 Cautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System              iiii kk kek   k  s App  4  Appendix 4 Host station status at power ON OFF when using the Q80BD J71LP21S 29                      App 10  Appendix 5 Warning Message Appears on Windows             ecceeceeeeeeeceeeeteeeseeeseneeeeeeeneseeeseaeeeneseneteneeeaes App 11  Appendix 5 1 Overview of warning Message              c  ccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceaeeceaeeecaeeesneeseaeeseaeeesueeeseaeensaees App 11  Appendix 5 2 Methods for preventing the warning MESSAQE                 cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteneeees App 12  Appendix 6 Combinations of Boards with Existing Softw
166. g the MELSECNET H board itself  the  transmission and reception lines in the transmission system and the cable  is  conducted      1  Connect optical fiber cables to the IN and OUT connectors of the Q80BD   J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G  and Q80BD J71LP21GE    In the case of the Q80BD J71BR11  for the coaxial bus system   connect  terminal resistors to the two Type F connectors     In the case of the Q830BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  In the case of the Q80BD J71BR11  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G and Q80BD J71LP21GE  for the coaxial bus system    for the optical loop system     o    OUT y    Terminal      HH   i Resistors 9 LT                          2  Set the mode setting in the  Board Information  screen of the MNETH Utility on   Self loopback test       Board Set         6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION       MELSEC     3  Click the   Board Set   button in the  Board Information  screen of the MNETH    utility to run the self loopback test  checking the LED status in the  Board  Information  screen to confirm the execution state    T  PASS blinks during the test    If T  PASS blinks 20 times and ERROR LED does not blink  the test is completed  normally    Also  if the test ends abnormally  the ERROR LED will blink as shown below to  indicate the relevant error information      a      b     Optical Loop System   Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD   J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE   1   TIME 
167. ger of data being cut when they are transmitted  via the MELSECNET 10        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 2 5 Common parameter setting screen operation    This operation sets the common parameters necessary for establishing data links   Display is possible only when the MELSECNETHH board is in the control station      1  B  W setting screen    B W setting   XY setting   Reserved station setting   Supplementary setting               Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot            Data Setting       2  Send Range Setting for Each Station              Total Station  4 StaNo  fi Pairing  No Par zj Set      Low Speed  Monitoring fener Send Range for LB  0o00     foorF LB  2000    20FF  Timefms  Each Station twloo00      oorr    EI EE       m Send Range for Each Station         Low Speed LV  ta     0000    gt 00FF  2000 lt    20FF 2000 lt   20FF Change      0100 lt   gt 01FF   2100 lt    21FF   2100 lt   gt 21FF    0100 lt   gt 01FF 2100 lt   gt 21FF 2100 lt   gt 21FF Delete    0200 lt   gt 02FF   2200 lt   gt 22FF   2200 lt   gt 22FF  Setting Clear                           Input the total number of stations  including the control station  in the network that the  MELSECNET H board is the control station for     Set whether pairing is enabled or not   Pairing    e If  Do Pairs  is selected  settings for the next station No  become the same as those for  9 the current one  being displayed with its  Send Range for Each Station  area masked     e Pairing is not available if the 
168. h monitoring For 16 point entry monitor  x  xl  p Device Type e Type  Device Type   ER extension file register  bi ay ao  Lxtrect inkin z   eee Network No  po    L   DeviceNo   r DeviceNo   HEX f DEC f oct 2090 F  C HEX   DEC C OCT fo i E T    Register Device List  ae a deve Vd device  2 hange  ae  Cancel          Set a type of devices to be monitored      Enter a block number for ER      Enter a network number for LX  LY  LB  LW  LSB  and LSW      Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG   Device No  Set the head number of the device to be monitored     HEX  Hexadecimal  DEC  Decimal  OCT  Octal     Register Device List Displays a list of the devices entered     button Enters the item set in Device type and Device number  then adds it  to List of devices entered     entered data   List of devices entered     The only devices that may be monitored using the 16 point entry monitor are those  that have random access capability  If a device that is not capable of random   access is specified  a device type error   3  will occur    Refer to  MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual  to determine whether or  not a device has random access capability        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 3 6 Changing word device values  Changes the specified word device value      1  Selecting the menu  Select  Device write     Data changing  from the menu bar      2  Dialog box    Data Changing xj    Device Type    Device Type   ER extension file register  bd  Bl
169. h the MELSECNET 10   board detected automatically and the channel of the remainder is used the   MELSECNET H board   is selected  channel numbers are assigned on a   priority basis from the MELSECNET 10 board installed in the personal   computer     Note  If 2 MELSECNET 10 boards and 3 MELSECNET H boards are  installed in one personal computer  if this item is selected  the third  MELSECNET H board will become unusable as shown in the figure  below  so exercise caution        MELSECNET 10 Board MELSECNET 10 Board MELSECNET H Board MELSECNET H Board MELSECNET H Board   first board   second board   first board   second board   third board   Set Channel No  Channel 51 Channel 52 Channel 53 Channel 54 Cannot be used     b  The channel is used from 51 with the MELSECNET 10 board of specified  I O port and the channel of the remainder is used the MELSECNET H  board    If the item   The channel is used from 51 with the MELSECNET 10 board of   specified I O port and the channel of the remainder is used the   MELSECNET H board   is selected  channel numbers are assigned on a   priority basis from the MELSECNET 10 board designated by the I O port    The channel numbers not used by the MELSECNET 10 board are used by   the MELSECNET H boards     Note  If 3 MELSECNET 10 boards and 2 MELSECNET H boards are  installed in one personal computer  if this item is selected  the  MELSECNET 10 board not designated by an I O port cannot be  used  So exercise caution        MELSECNET 10 Board MELSEC
170. he  Routing Parameter Setting  screen     Button Refer to section 9 2 4 Routing Parameter Setting operation for details     Routing Paran  Transler Transfers the routing parameter that has been set     Button    Displays the  Common Parameters Setting  screen  i This button is displayed only when the MELSECNET H board is a control station     Reconnect    Return as normal station    For Q80BD J71BR11  LED    MNET H coaxial     Z2     7 3 m    Button Refer to section 9 2 5   Common Parameters Setting Screen operation  for details     Transmits the set common parameters   Button This button is displayed only when the MELSECNET H board is a control station      1  When assigning 2000 bytes or more to the number of link points sent by a station   set all stations including control stations and normal stations to the  MELSECNET H Extended mode     2  If T PASS LED flickers at uncertain intervals  take the corrective action by  referring to Section 14 4        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 2 4 Routing Parameter Setting screen operation    The routing parameter setting screen is used to set the transfer destination  relay  destination network number  and relay destination station number      1  The routing parameters are common with channels No  51 to 54     They cannot be set one channel No  at a time    2  Up to 64 routine parameters can be set        MELSECNETZH Routing Parameter Setting       r Data Setting       Transfer to Intermediate Intermediate  No  Network No  Ne
171. he link mode  set to  ONLINE            NO  YES  1  2  3   Go to the next page  Go to the next page  Go to the next page     14 15 14 15    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC          MNETH utility     User program    Set to  ONLINE  in the Stop the user program and   Board information  setting perform the same operation  screen  as for the MNETH utility                        Set the PLC data link mode  to ONLINE  and reset   reset             NO YES    Did the data link  return to normal                Complete            Is the station number  set correctly               User program    Power off the PC  then set  the correct station number   Power on the power again     MNETH utility    Power off the PC  then set  the correct station number   Power on the power again        Power off the PLC  then set  the correct station number   Power on the power again              NO YES        Did the data link  return to normal           Check with a self loopback test at the      faulty station  Complete                                 NO  Is there any error     Replace the MELSECNET H board  YES network module of the faulty station   NO YES        Did the data link  return to normal           Check the link cables before and after      the faulty station using a station to  Complete    station test           Replace the faulty link cable     Did the data link  return to normal             Consult with the dealer regarding  the problem        Complete      14 16 14  16    14 TRO
172. he original state              Execute the program continuously  for a sufficient period to confirm that  the error does not recur              14   20 14   20    14 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC       14 5 5 Precautions for installing other optional board    Executing user programs  including the device monitor utility  for each board  simultaneously under the following condition may cause an error   When an error occurs in the user program  take the action shown below      lt Condition gt   A personal computer into which the MELSECNET H board and other optional  board are installed and where the resources were allocated automatically by  Plug and Play is used      lt Action gt    1  Change the positions where the MELSECNET H board and other optional    board are installed    2  Inthe BIOS setup  exchange the IRQs between the MELSECNET H board  and other optional board or change their IRQs     14 21 14 21    14 TROUBLESHOOTING       MELSEC    14 6 When external power supply function does not work properly    START            YES  Is the  EXT PW  LED lit     Please consult your local Mitsubishi  NO representative     Is the connector  cable side   properly connected to the external power supply  cable connector           NO       Insert the connector  cable side  to the  YES external power supply cable connector  until a click is heard             Is the external               NO  power supply cable wiring correct    Refer to Section 6 4 4    Connect the cables correctly   YES  Is t
173. he voltage across NO        connector pins  cable side  within the specified range    Refer to Section 3 2         Check the external power supply     NO  Is the  EXT PW  LED lit     Please consult your local Mitsubishi  YES representative     END          14 22 14 22    14 TROUBLESHOOTING       MELSEC    14 7 Measures for WDT error occurrence    14 23    The following explains the causes of WDT error occurrence in MELSECNET H board  and measures for them      1  Cause of WDT error occurrence  The WDT error occurs in MELSECNET H board as follows   1  MELSECNET H driver cannot operate because the PC or OS is hang up     2  The CPU cannot start to control the MELSECNET H driver within the WDT  time  as the other drive has occupied the CPU processing      2  Corrective measures for WDT error   When the WDT error occurs  perform the following    e Check the event viewer for a system error in the PC  and remove the error  cause if identified    e On the  Driver  screen of the MNETH utility software  adjust the Watch Dog  Timer Monitoring Time Setting value    For details  refer to Section 9 2 11  Driver screen operation      e Reset the MELSECNET H board  or restart the PC      For resetting by the MNETH utility software  refer to Section 9 2 9  Memory   I O Test screen operation       14 23    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       14 8 Measures for Slow PC Operation    This section explains probable causes and corrective measures when a PC becomes  slow      1  Possible cau
174. iations for control station and normal station  and symbol format    This section explains abbreviations for control station and normal station  and  symbol format to be used in this manual      a  Abbreviation    Abbreviation    Me Control station  Normal station  Station that can serve as a control station    b  Symbol format  Mpo    o0  Group number  1 to 32   GO  Station number  1 to 64     Abbreviation  Network No   1 to 239                                 Example   1  Network No  3  control station  station number 6  3MP6  2  Network No  5  normal station  station number 3  5Ns3    PACKING LIST  The packing list of the MELSECNET H board is given below     Item Quantity    1  Connector set for external power supply cable Q80BD J71LP21S 25 only   F type connector  AGRCON F   Q80BD J71BR11 only     Before Using the Product        1  Software license agreement_____________________L_ d      dn    Software license agreement  x1  Manuals are stored on the CD ROM in PDF format     MEMO    1 OVERVIEW MELSEC       1 OVERVIEW    This is a manual you read when using the MELSCNET H board in the MELSECNET H  mode or MELSECNET H Extended mode  When using the MELSCNET H board in  the MELSCNET H network  refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network  System Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network    Also  when using the board in the  MELSECNET 10 network system  refer to  For QnA Q4AR Corresponding  MELSECNET 10 network system reference manual         1 1 Overview    The MELSECNETHH is a n
175. ical cable   25 Mbps Broad band H PCF optical cable  QSI optical cable  SI optical cable  H PCF optical cable   10 MB  s Broad band H PCF optical cable  QSI optical cable    64 Stations  Control station  1  Normal station  63     62 5 GI optical cable    2km  6562 ft      Optical fiber cable  30km  98430 ft      200m  656 2 ft      400m  1312 4 ft      1km  3281 ft      1km  3281 ft      500m  1640 5 ft      1km  3281 ft      1km  3281 ft      1km  3281 ft    239  32  When in the MELSECNET 10 Mode  9   Duplex loop  Token ring system  Frame synchronization system  NRZI encoding  Non return to Zero inverted   HDLC Standard  Frame format   CRC  X    X       X    1  and retry by overtime     GI optical cable    2km  6562 ft        Loop back function  optical loop system only  by abnormal detection and cable disconnection   a   System down prevention through control station   RAS TUheli  n e Error detection by the link special relay and link special register   etc     Transient transmission N  N communications  Special cyclic transmission Low speed cyclic transmission    Number of boards that can be  installed    Installation slot    Maximum 4 boards        PC PCI  Express    X1  X2  X4   X8  X16 slot   half size     PC PCI bus slot     half size  PC PCI bus slot  half size     Exclusive slots  Voltage    Suitable cable  size   5 V DC Internal current  consumption    3 3 V DC Internal current  consumption    Weight    20 4 to 31 2 V DC  0 16 A    Connector set   Accessory     1 sl
176. ied program wants access to your computer    User Account Control    Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it  before   NETHUTL exe       Ca Unidentified Publisher    To continue  type an administrator password  and then click OK           Ad Caps Lock is on    User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer     WY  Details        lt Using Windows   7 gt      5  User Account Control               j f j  Do you want to allow the following program from an  N  Z unknown publisher to make changes to this computer     Program name  NETHUTL exe  Verified publisher  Unknown  File origin  Hard drive on this computer    To continue  type an administrator password  and then click Yes     Admin          M  Show details             When the utility is activated  and if the following User  Account Control screen is displayed requesting a  selection of user with administrator authority and  password entry   1  the user who is logging on to the  system does not have an administrator authority   Log off the system and login again as a user with  administrator authority  and activate the utility    2        1  If only one user account with administrator authority is available  the User Account Control screen requests the  password entry of its user only    2  For details on how to prevent this screen from being displayed  refer to Appendix 5     14 3 14 3    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       Error detail Cause determination method
177. ifications appear             App   11    APPENDIX MELSEC       Appendix 5 2 Methods for preventing the warning message    The user account control  UAC  function prevents a crash  e g  prevention of start     up of a program which executes unintended operation    Before setting this function  grasp that the security function offered by UAC will be  disabled and fully understand the risk        The following two methods are available for preventing a warning message      1  Disabling the user account control function  The following shows a procedure for disabling the user account control function       Ga eme    dv   1  Select  Start      Control Panel    Internet Explorer      ay E mail   EL   Windows Mail   gt  Documents   Welcome Center   a Pictures  SWEA Backup Status and Configuration     p Music    g Windows Media Player  Search    pI  Small Business Resources  Sy Windows Fax and Scan  g Windows Meeting Space        EB  Windows Photo Gallery       ED Windows Live Messenger Download  w    W Paint    Network and Internet  Connect to the   nternet  Vie    Hardware and Sound    Recent Items  Computer  Network  Connect To  Control Panel  Default Programs    Help and Support    Taar Ec      Appearance and  Personalization  Cha ck    Cust  Adj       Clock  Language  and Region  Change keyboards or other input    r other media automatically    2  Select  User Accounts                To next page     App   12    App   12    APPENDIX MELSEC        From preceding page     3  Selec
178. ile is not compatible with the version of Windows you re running  Check  your computer s system information to see whether you need an x86  32 bit  or x64  64 bit   version of the program  and then contact the software publisher         b  User programs created in the Japanese environment work only  in the Japanese environment     c  User programs created in the English environment work only in  the English environment     2 11 2 11    2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  MELSEC       MEMO    PECIFICATION  3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC       3 SPECIFICATIONS    This section explains the MELSECNET H board general specifications  performance  specifications     3 1 General Specifications    This section explains the MELSECNET H board general specifications     Specifications    Storage ambient humidity       5 to 95   RH  non condensing    acceleration   amplitude  5 to 8 4 Hz  rose 3 5 mm 10 times each in         3 X  Y and Z  Compliant with 8 4 to 150 Hz directions  Vibration resistance JIS B 3502 and   ae  IEC 61131 2 Under continuous vibration    5 to 8 4 Hz    8 4 to 150 Hz    Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502 and  IEC 61131 2  147 mis     3 times each in X  Y  and Z directions     x1  Do not use or store the board under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om   Doing so may cause a malfunction    x2  This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected  between the public electrical power distribution network and the 
179. ing  wiring and  13JL93     troubleshooting for MELSECNET 10 board   Option     MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual    a     TN 7 SH 081035ENG  This manual explains the programming  function specifications  and sample programming of the  13JV25     MELSEC data link library   Option        REMARK    MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual is stored on the CD ROM of software  package with PDF file    Manuals in printed form are sold separately for single purchase  Order a manual by  quoting the manual number  model code  listed in the table above     HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL     How to Use This Manual  differs depending on the purpose for which the  MELSECNET H board is used  Use this manual with reference to the following  contents      1      2      5      6      7      8     When desiring an overview or to know the features of the  MELSECNET H board  Chapter 1   Chapter 1 gives an overview of the MELSECNET H board and its features     When desiring to know about the system configuration   Chapter 2     Chapter 2 gives the system configuration     When desiring to know the specifications of the MELSECNET H  board  Chapter 3   Chapter 3 gives the specifications of the MELSECNET H board     When desiring to know the functions of the MELSECNET H board   Chapter 4   Chapter 4 gives the functions of the MELSECNET H board     When desiring to know the procedure up to the point of operation  of the MELSECNET H board and settings  Chapter 6     Chapter 6 gives the procedures up
180. ings is shown below           Board information settings  1  Channel eee MELSECNET H  1st board to 4th board   2  Network type  MNET H mode  MNET H EX mode   MNET 10 mode               Network settings    1  Network No  1 to 239   2  Station No  1 to 64  Optical loop    1 to 32  Coaxial bus    3  Control station   Normal station settings   Set the following items as necessary    4  Group No        Control station     No       Common parameters       1  Transmission range of each station   LB LW  LX LY settings    2  Total number of link stations   Set the following items as necessary    3  I O master station setting   4  Reserved station setting       Supplementary settings          Control station return setting                   Set the following functions  as necessary          Not  necessary       Necessary      Opposite party setting  when accessing a multiple    CPU system or redundant CPU system        Biel gated et Gela ae Ra We a ek Akin re sk   bende cc de db as Pe n SEA dikk Fiat ok e      Routing parameter setting transmission    MELSECNETHH board information update j    Connection of cables   Heee Refer to Section 6 4              When replacing a board  you may need the channel numbers and parameter  settings that were used before the replacement  When reinstalling the software    package  you need to reset the channel numbers and the parameter settings  Be  sure to record channel numbers and parameter settings when you have set  parameters        7 PARAMETER SE
181. ion is performed in the order of control station     gt  normal station     6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION       MELSEC     4  Click the   Board Set   button in the  Board Information  screen of the MNETH    utility to run the station to station test  checking the LED status in the  Board  Information  screen to confirm the execution state    If T  PASS blinks 20 times and ERROR LED does not blink  the test is completed  normally    Also  if the test ends abnormally  the following ERROR LED or L  ERR  LED will  blink as shown below to indicate the relevant error information      a      b     Optical Loop System   Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD   J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE   1   TIME  LED lights up    The forward loop cable is broken     The forward loop s transmission side and reception side cables are  not connected   2   DATA LED lights up    The reverse loop cable is broken     The reverse loop s transmission side and reception side cables are  not connected   3  The  CRC    OVER  and  AB IF  LEDs light up on the F LOOP and  R LOOP sides    The cable is defective   4   UNDER  LED lights up     Hardware error     The cable was disconnected during the test     The cable was broken during the test     Coaxial Bus System  Q80BD J71BR11     1   TIME  LED lights up    The connector is disconnected   2  The  CRC    OVER  and  AB IF  LEDs light up on the F LOOP and  R LOOP sides    The connector is defective   3   DATA  and  UNDE
182. ion may be executed even if IN and IN or OUT and OUT are    connected with an optical fiber cable  However  the loopback function  the network  diagnostic function and some of other functions do not operate normally  So  make  sure to connect IN and OUT        6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION       6 4 2 Coaxial bus system    MELSEC    This section explain precautions for connection of the coaxial cable and Q80BD   J71BR11 in the coaxial bus system      1  Precautions in connecting   a  Restrictions on the cable length between the stations    1     When connecting between the network modules  the cable lengths  indicated in the table below should be used according to the number of  stations connected    A communication error may occur if a cable length other than the  lengths indicated in the table is used     Number of stations  connected 2 to 9 stations 10 to 33 stations  Station to station cable length    Cable type    0 to 1 m  3 28 ft    cable less than 1m  3 28 in   in length cannot be used      1  3 28 ft   to 5 m  16 4 ft         za 2    a  42 65  to 7 m  65rat __ __o _T o lol o    r esran  25m    rssat    o   o  x  x    _25    75 63 tt  to 300 m  93431   o   o Jol o         ao  9843 ft  to oo m    5    x   o   x o      2     3     O  Allowed X  Not allowed    If there is a possibility of adding more stations to expand the existing  system  the cables should be installed by considering restriction 1   mentioned above in advance    When using a rep
183. iple CPU system compatible network module is for function version B and subsequent products    2  In the multiple CPU system  a network module that becomes a relay station is the same as the control CPU     1 OVERVIEW MELSEC        1  For the MELSECNET H  please select the QCPU  Q Mode  and Q compatible  network modules      2  If the QnACPU or ACPU are included in the same network  select the       MELSECNET 10 mode which is compatible with the MELSECNET 10    3  All of network modules and MELSECNET H boards within the same network  must be set to the same mode  network type    1    1  MELSECNET H mode  MELSECNET H Extended mode and  MELSECNET 10 mode are available        1 2 Features  The features of the MELSECNET H board are as shown below      1  A personal computer can be incorporated into MELSECNET H   By mounting the MELSECNET H board in a personal computer  the personal    computer can be used as a MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 control station  or normal station     Board model name Supported network    Q80BD J71LP21 25 MELSECNET H Mode  MELSECNET H  10 Mbps   25 Mbps  Optical  Q81BD J71LP21 25 MELSECNET H Extended Mode   Loop System    Q80BD J71LP21S 25   MELSECNET 10 Mode MELSECNET 10 Optical Loop System    MELSECNET H Mode  MELSECNET H  10 Mbps  Coaxial Bus  Q80BD J71BR11 MELSECNETI H Extended Mode   System      MELSECNET 10 Mode   Mode   MELSECNET 10 Mode   MELSECNET 10 Coaxial Bus System   Coaxial Bus   MELSECNET 10 Coaxial Bus System    MELSECNET H Mode  MELSECNET
184. it     Install the MELSECNET H board to the PCI bus slot of the PC       Fix the MELSECNET H board with the PC s board fixing screws                           For other than Q80BD J71LP21S 25       For Q80BD J71LP21S 25          Make an external  power supply cable     4  Refer to Section 6 4 4  External power    Connect the external power supply supply cable wiring  cable to the Q80BD J71LP21S 25   Turn on the external power supply       Power off the PC and install the SWODNC MNETH QB   Refer to Chapter 8   INSTALLING AND  UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGE                        Perform the wiring between the MELSECNET H board and each station  Refer to Section 6 4  Cable connection    Perform standalone check of MELSECNET H board    Refer to Section 6 5  Standalone check  MELSECNET H board  Offline tests   Perform parameter setting for MELSECNET H   Refer to Chapter 7   PARAMETER SETTING   Perform offline tests of MELSECNET H board  Refer to Section 6 6   Offline Tests           Execute user program or each utility   Refer to Chapter 9   Utility Operation    Refer to Chapter 11   MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY   Complete      It is necessary to perform settings on the control station side in order to use the   MELSECNETH H board as a normal station  Set the control station side as required    Refer to manuals listed below for the setting on the control station side      Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual  PLC to  PLC network      For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Ne
185. ite Data Format Option Help                                                                                          51 MELSECNET 10    H  1 slot  r Data Format  The Channel Information in the Current Display   Bit device    Vertical indication    Network No    0    Station No    255       Refer to Section 9 3 9 on how to change the display form   Refer to Section 9 3 4 on how to set the network    3  Data format Shows the display form and device types being displayed   word device and bit device      Refer to Section 9 3 5 on how to change the device type   And  refer to Section 9 3 9 on how to change the display form        TILITY OPERATION  ie 5 2 MELSEC       9 3 3 Setting as 16 point entry monitor  Monitors up to five bit devices and one word device simultaneously      1  Selecting the menu  Select  Menu     16 point entry monitor  from the menu bar    Selectable at batch monitoring only       2  Display screen    l   Device Monitor Utility  oT x   Menu Setting Device Write Data Format Option Help       W 0000  vv 0001  W 0002  W 0003  W 0004  W 0005  W 0006  W 0007  W 0008  W 0009  W 000A  W 0005  W 000C  Wv 000D  W 000E   vv OOOF    o       z3                                                              oo olm g oloo oloa       r 51 MELSECNETMO   JH  1 slot  r Data Format  The Channel Information in the Current Display  Network No    0 Station No    255 Koree  DEC  16bit              Refer to Section 9 3 9 on how to change the display form   Refer to Section 9 3 4 on h
186. itor      Others   Displays messages generated by the  application packages     Open the Selected File    Open the error log file     ELF      ee  ie the error log data of the error entry source  driver  etc        currently being selected to the specified file    Delete Erase the error log data of the error entry source  driver  etc        currently being displayed   Follow the instructions displayed on the dialog box     Log Setting Select a processing method to be used when the number of error  logs exceeds the maximum entry     Log Setting    How to Control Messages of Exceeding the Log Size Limit    Overwrites information  starting  with the oldest message   C Suspend Logging until there will be an enough space  lt 4 No new registration entries will be    made until enough space becomes  Cancel Heed         Replace Old Messages      available by deleting existing data              End the error viewer     9 UTILITY OPERATIONS       MELSEC    9 4 3 Display menu    The following explains the contents of display menu     p Communication Support Softwa   Loa Help    Type All Errors  Specific Error      x     Search KA  Detail Enter    Renew F5         Item Content l  All Errors Displays all error occurrences for each type of error entry source     Specific Error Sets the errors to be displayed on the screen according to the  conditions specified in the dialog box shown below      Speciic Eror  Display Condition   Start Display Condition      FistErorLog ___________   _   Dis
187. l Network Servic  Network Connections Manages 0    Started Manual Local System  Network List Service Identifies th    Started Manual Local Service  Network Location Awar    Collects an    Started Automatic Network Servic  Network Store Interface  This service    Started Automatic Local Service    Office Source Engine Manual Local System    Offline Files The Offline    Started Automatic Local System        i Parental Controls This service     Manual Local Service    rm            Extended  Standard                         App   31 App   31    APPENDIX MELSEC       MEMO    App   32 App   32    WARRANTY  Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product     1  Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range    If any faults or defects  hereinafter  Failure   found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product  within the gratis warranty term  the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service  Company    However  if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location  expenses to send an engineer will be solely at  the customer s discretion  Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning  maintenance  or testing on   site that involves replacement of the failed module      Gratis Warranty Term   The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for three years after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated  place   Note that after manufacture and shi
188. l ae adele Aiea ele See a Ke a a e Ge de na a SEA 6 24    r   Qu AL   DAD DD DA A DD levi caer une DD EE AE EE DD 6 26  6 6 Offline Tests DD DD    gees eee ae le ended pe teed vin alee eae evened eee 6 27  6 651     Station  to Station teSt    2   25525 2 ir   sib   ar   l     E   al  k   2L   Sadik    Retinol A ee 6 27  6 6 2 Forward loop Reverse loop test    kk kk keke kk kk   k  k kk KAKA kK KA KK KAK KK KAK KAK 6 30  7 1 Board Information Settings  a i tayin cani okey   kire   n birln   a nik QO bini ke nia    e b  n   k GOR   A 7  2   2 Network Settings sall cae   i 2an la   an     da n  n lie dak   ka a   kh a   kak   ra dea el Ale   k   y   kaka 7  3  C24  Network NO kc Enca asa eal Ade Aah all aah Aan hail r xale XARE eske nenn Kere   n   dwa d9 7  3  T22 Station NOs jensen ede died eee ae ore ete opal dep gee de pees ted aera neater rele 7  3  7 2 3  Control station Normal StatiOr  s   4   xas ku alik lt   di u kil ke Kin Kake kk Ed   k   i k  n kr e kelka Bade aba kak   7  3  VAPA    Group NOs QES SER MO oc DEN My NN A hee R   E EA SL ree SEK ade sa a yee De en 7 4  E259  Modesa nere EEE E AE EE EEE A 7  4  7 2 6 Parameter setting OxAMple            cecccscccecceecerecceeceeecensceeecenecenecenecenceneaeneceneaeeeceneceneceeeeeseaeeeneeaeneaeees 7  5       3 lt GOMMON  Paramete Sia n a ayan yar   yaaa d  k eed ed ed ec    KE a   eed ec et accel 7  6    7 3 1 Send range for each station  LB LW settings               i Ek kk kek   kk kek kK KAK RAKR 7  6  7 3 2 Send r
189. last station No  is selected for  Sta  No       button Registers the set contents in each station s transmission range   Send Range for Each Station  Displays the set data contents up to the present time in one list     Select the line to change  then when the button is clicked  the data which are registered can  button be changed   If the line to be changed is double clicked  the same operation can be  performed      Select the line to change  then when the button is clicked  the data which are set can be  button deleted        Initializes the contents of all the B and W settings registered in the  Common parameter  Settings Clear   Button ies  setting  screen      1  Paring is not available if the operating system is Windows   95 or Windows   98   x2  For the MELSECNET H Extended mode  up to 35840 bytes can be set to number  of link points per station     9 12 9 12       TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC        2  X  Y setting screen    MELSECNET H Common parameter setting    B W setting   Y setting   Reserved station setting   Supplementary setting                    gt  Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot        Block 1 setting       r Data Setting       Send Range Setting for Each Station        Total Station fa Sta No  E Set     Beeld  2000 BR   1200     iar      200  fFF    Send Range   Pa SN Winnie fzo f  r efo aF             r Send Range for Each Station                        Send Range M  gt L  Send Range M lt  L    Sta No ___ LY 1  Lx  Lx  Lyf   1000 lt   gt 10FF 1000 lt
190. le No  0  nivali  aS CPU module  a r x x n x uses 2 slols   switehing inihost     switching In Hos  Module No  1  Indicates the module to  system system to the right of CPU module    Module No 11  Indicates the module at  the right end of a 12 I O  slot base  Q312B                             Refer to SD1690 for module No  for network module requesting  route switching in other system    e Any of the following bits turns on corresponding to module No  for  network module requesting route switching in other system   Turns off by the system after recovery from error of the relevant  module by user     Bit status  Module No  for Module No  for b15to bit to b1 b0 0  OFF    network module   network module sp1690  0 pn  ono  1  ON  SD1690  requesting route   requesting route    Module No  0  Invalid  as CPU module  die tee i SAME a   uses 2 slots   switching in other   switching in other                            Module No  1  Indicates the module to    system system to the right of CPU module    Module No 11  Indicates the module at  the right end of a 12 I O  slot base  Q312B     Refer to SD1590 for module No  for network module requesting  route switching in host system        App   9 App   9    APPENDIX MELSEC       Appendix 4 Host station status at power ON OFF when using the Q80BD J71LP21S 25    When using the Q80BD J71LP21S 25  the host station status varies depending on the  ON OFF status of the external power supply and personal computer as shown below      1  When the sy
191. lic could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT      Railway companies or Public service purposes  and or any other cases in which establishment of a  special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User      Aircraft or Aerospace  Medical applications  Train equipment  transport equipment such as Elevator  and Escalator  Incineration and Fuel devices  Vehicles  Manned transportation  Equipment for  Recreation and Amusement  and Safety devices  handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or  Chemicals  Mining and Drilling  and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to  the public or property     Notwithstanding the above  restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion  authorize use of the  PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications  provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is  limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special  quality assurance or fail safe  redundant or other safety features which exceed the general  specifications of the PRODUCTs are required  For details  please contact the Mitsubishi  representative in your region     REVISIONS      The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover     Print Date   lt  Manual Number  Nov   2000  SH  NA  080128 A First printing    Mar   2001  SH  Jun   2001  SH  J    an   2002  SH       3   1  3     Dec   2002  SH  May  2004  SH     NA  080128 B     NA  080128 C     NA  080128
192. line     And is its station number set  to 1 to 64     NO    Correct the control station mode and    station number then reset the programmable  YES controller CPU and MELSECNETIH board            NO YES       Did the data link begin       Complete    NO                  Is the watchdog time  setting for parameter  greater than the link  scan time        Correct the set value for watchdog    time        YES    NO YES  Did the data link begin                Is the control station s   RUN  LED lit           Are the  RUN  LEDs  of the first station through  the last station lit     YES  1  2  3   Go to the next page  Go to the next page  Go to the next page     14 13 14   13    14 TROUBLESHOOTING                                                                      1  2  3   Replace the MELSECNET H board  network module of the faulty station  among the control station and first through  last stations   NO YES   lt  Did the data link begin   gt    Perform self loopback tests for the  control station and first through last  stations   YES  Is there any station with error   Replace the MELSECNET H board  network module of the faulty station   NO YES  Did the data link begin   gt    Check the loop line using a station to   station test   YES  Replace the faulty cable  Did the data link begin   gt    NO  y          Consult with the dealer regarding the   Complete    problem     REMARK    For the Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25 or Q80BD J71LP21S 25 with the  communication speed set 
193. ll the utility        8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE  MELSEC       8 1 2 Installing driver    This explains installing the driver for the MELSECNET H board     When using Windows NT     the driver is installed at the same time as the utility  installation      1  Installation   1  Power OFF the personal computer and install the MELSECNET H board  to the personal computer    2  Power ON the personal computer and insert the CD ROM to the CD   ROM drive    3  By following the on screen instructions described below for each  operating system  select or enter the necessary information    For instructions which are not described below and are difficult to  determine  refer to Section 8 1 3          a  Using Windows   95  Windows   98         Add New Hardware Wizard       1  The  Add New Hardware Wizard  screen is displayed     What do you want Windows to do     Select  Search for the best driver for the your device     Recommended     then click the button        Display a list of all the drivers in a specific  location  so you can select the driver you want            lt  Back Cancel             Add New Hardware Wizard       2  Check  Specify a location    specify   Drivers Win9x Us  of the  CD ROM drive to be used and click the button      Example   D   Drivers Win9x Us      Windows will search for new drivers in its driver database  on your hard drive  and in any of the following selected  locations  Click Next to start the search     T Floppy disk drives    
194. lly operating station connected between other stations with  power off computers will not be disconnected from the data link    Another advantage is that the link scan time is stabilized since loopback can be  also prevented     Normal station Normal station   Station No 2   Station No 3     Personal          External power  supply                Personal    Normal station   Station No 6     Data link continued    Normal station   Station No 4     Personal  computer        CPU LP21     25    Normal station   Station No 5         External power  supply       When station No  3 and No 5 use MELSECNET H boards without the external  power supply function and if their personal computers are powered off  station  No 4 is cut off from the network as well as No 3 and No 5     Personal computer    Station No 1 Station No 2 OX Station No 3                   Station No 6 OY Station No 5 Station No 4 Disconnected    Personal computer    2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  MELSEC       2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION    2 1 MELSECNET H Board System Configuration    The system configuration when the MELSECNET H board is mounted to a personal  computer is shown below                                               Personal Computer       Install    SWODNC MNETH B       Install          Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25                   Q80BD J71LP21G             Q80BD J71LP21GE             Q80BD J71BR11       MELSECNET H  mode    MELSECNET H  Extended mode    i Optical fiber  cable    Type of
195. machinery within the premises  Category  ll applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities  The surge voltage  withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V     3  This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in  which the equipment is used  Pollution level 2 is when only non conductive pollution occurs  A temporary  conductivity caused by condensation must be expected occasionally     General specifications both MELSECNET H board and a personal computer must  be satisfied after installation     1 75 mm    Frequenc constant Hal   Sweep count  q y acceleration   amplitude P       PECIFICATION  3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC       3 2 Performance Specifications    MELSECNET H Board performance specifications are shown below    1  Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25   Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE    Item 2  Q80BD J71LP21 25 EN e nere  Q80BD J71LP21S 25   Q80BD J71LP21G   Q80BD J71LP21GE       8192 Points  16384 Points  When in the MELSECNET 10 Mode       8192 Points   16384 Points  When in the MELSECNET 10 Mode   2  8192 Points   e MELSECNET H mode  MELSECNET 10 mode       LY   LB  8   2 x LW   lt  2000 bytes    MELSECNET H Extended mode         LY   LB    8    2 x LW    lt  35840 bytes    25 Mbps   10 Mbps 10 Mbps    Maximum links  in 1 network    Maximum links in 1 station    Number of stations    Between  stations  length       SI optical cable  H PCF opt
196. mage    6  Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi    7  Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user     2  Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production     1  Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven  7  years after production of the product is discontinued   Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins  etc    2  Product supply  including repair parts  is not available after production is discontinued     3  Overseas service  Overseas  repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center  Note that the repair conditions at each FA  Center may differ     4  Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability    Regardless of the gratis warranty term  Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause  found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi  loss in opportunity  lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi  products  special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not   compensation for accidents  and  compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products  replacement by the user  maintenance of on site  equipment  start up test run and other tasks     5  Changes in product specifications    The specifications given in the catalogs  manuals or technical documen
197. mal abnormal  SB0088H SW0088  to 8BH  CPU and personal computer operation status of  SB0084 SW0084 to 87  each station  RUN STOP  NN    Cyclic transmission status of each station SB0074nH SW0074 to 77H  The external power supply status of each station SBO008CH SW008Cu to 8FH    SBO0068H  Link scan  communication mode ee SW0068 to 6DH      Setting information of the network   information of the network   SB0054H to 69H   to 69H   SWO0054H to 68H_  to 68H    Running information of the network SB0070H SW0070h to 73H  SB0090   to 9A   SWO090   to OF     3  To know redundant CPU system information    Operating mode of redundant CPU SBO01F4H SWO01F4u to 1F7H       Pairing setting of each station SBO1F8H SW01F8u to 1FBH  System status in redundant CPU system SBO01FCu SWO1FCu to 1FFH       11 5    11 PROGRAMMIN  Edi   MELSEC       MEMO    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS                      Basic Cyclic transmission function       Communication LB LW  functions  Periodical communication  L Communication LX LY  RAS function                                  Automatic return function Refer to Q Corresponding  ee MELSECNETI H Network System 12  m Control station switch function Reference Manual  H Control station return control function  PLC to PLC network       Loopback function  optical loop system       Prevention of station failure by using external  power supply  optical loop system   L Diatnostic function HHHH rk KK KK KK KK KK KK eee kk eee KK    KK KK KK KK KAK Section 6 5  6 6  Applica
198. n error occurs when data are sent to the same channel which is being used        CPU module   Target station Driver User application       Channel 1 Channel 1 main      Channel 2 Channel 2  Channel 3 Channel 3 mdOpen  51   1   amp path     Channel 4 Channel 4  Channel 5 Channel 5 mdSend  path  255    gt    Channel 6 Channel 6 vy    Channel 7 Channel 7  Channel 8 Channel 8             mdClose  path                             2  Only an even number byte can be specified for a send data size     3  Logical station numbers cannot be specified     4  Even if the process of data send is completed normally with  arrival  acknowledgment  execution type  data may not be received when the target  station is a board  For details  refer to the RECV function        12 22 12 22    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       MELSEC     2  RECV function    The RECV function reads data received by the board from the other station  using the mdReceive function      lt  RECV function overview  gt        Driver User application    Reception buffer of driver               Received data of Channel 3 Received data storage  data           Received data of Channel 7 Send target network No     Board Send source station No           Received data of Channel 1        2    _   Send source channel No   Received data of Channel 5    Read by the  Received data of Channel 4 mdReceive       Sending station              Channel 1  Channel 2  Channel 3  Channel 4  Channel 5  Channel 6  Channel 7  Channel 8                 
199. n of LX LY  which represent the amount of data that  can be sent by each station in a single network in one  two  block units    The link devices  LX LY  between the I O master station  M station  and other station   L station  are assigned 1 1    The following example shows send ranges for each station  LX LY settings  when each  of 512 points of link devices  LX LY  is assigned to station numbers 2 to 4  using  station number 1  host  as the I O master station of block 1      1  Setting example                                                                                        xo 1Mp1 YO x 1Ns2 Y x 1Ns3 Y x_ 1Ns4__y r      Actual I O Actual I O Actual l O  X1000 Y1000 a  to G to  gt   X11FF YFF  zZ    Q    Zyr   r y     i r   _ Lee  X1200 Y1200   amp   gt   to to  X13FF YY 13FF  X1400 Y1400 WY      gt   to to  X15FF YY 15FF   CS virerh Ti i ee es A ee  X1FFF YY 1FFF  1 O master station        MNELSECNETIH board     1Mp1 1Ns2 1Ns3 INSA    o Sala nd kd8 1Ns8   M station   L station   L station   L station    J  ea a   NAN a      Network No  1                P                                                          7 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC        2  Screen settings  Common parameter settings   To set the transmission range for each station  LX LY settings   perform the  settings in  Common parameter settings  in the MNETH utility     MELSECNET H Common parameter setting    B W setting   Y setting   Reserved station setting   Supplementary setting                 gt  Cha
200. n status                 SB7A  7B The transmission completion is indicated by the  on off status of either bit SB7A or 7B  A A       Low speed cyclic interval    Shows the redundant CPU system status  SW1FC to SW1FF   Control or Standby  of each station  Control system   1    Standby system  Each bit corresponds to each station status     1  Stations in other than the redundant CPU system configuration are OFF        5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE       MELSEC    5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE    Compliance with the EMC Directive  which is one of the EU directives  has been  mandatory for the products sold within EU member states since 1996 as well as  compliance with the Low Voltage Directive since 1997    To prove the compliance  manufactures must issue an EC Declaration of Conformity  and the products must bear a CE marking      1  Sales representative in EU member states  The authorized representative in EU member states will be   Company name  Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV  Address  Gothaer Strasse 8  40880 Ratingen  Germany    5 1 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive    The EMC Directive sets two requirements for compliance  emission  conducted and  radiated electromagnetic energy emitted by a product  and immunity  the ability of a  product to not be influenced by externally generated electromagnetic energy     This section summarizes the precautions for machinery constructed with the  MELSECNET H board to comply with the EMC Directive    These precautions are b
201. n the   Channel No  Setting  screen in the  Board List  screen of the MNETH utility     After the change  the set assignment in  Channel No  Setting  becomes  valid        As MNETH utility products  SWODNC MNETH B   version 19V or later  store  channel numbers assigned to each MELSECNET H board  these channel numbers  will automatically be set when a PCI slot is changed    Channel numbers will automatically be assigned as follows      lt When using a MELSECNET H board that has not assigned channel numbers gt   e Channel numbers will be assigned in a PCI slot number order      lt When using a MELSECNET H board that has assigned channel numbers gt    e Previously used channel numbers will be assigned    e  f previously used channel numbers are used already  unused channel numbers  will be assigned    As the utility software stores channel numbers corresponding to a MELSECNET H   board  if the utility software is reinstalled  the board will be the status that any   channel numbers are not assigned         2  Ifthe MELSECNET 10 board is used in the personal computer  Select the following items used by the MELSECNET 10 board in the  Driver      Combination setting with the MELSECNET 10 board   then restart the personal  computer     App   1 App   1    APPENDIX MELSEC        a  The channel is used from channel 51 with the MELSECNET 10 board  detected automatically and the channel of the remainder is used the  MELSECNET H board    If the item  The channel is used from channel 51 wit
202. nal power supply supply cable wiring  cable to the Q80BD J71LP21S 25     y    Turn on the external power supply     Power off the PC and install the SWODNC MNETH B     Perform the wiring between the MELSECNET H board and each station     Refer to Section 6 4  Cable connection      Perform standalone check of MELSECNET H board    Refer to Section 6 5  Standalone check    MELSECNETI H board  Offline tests                       Reset parameters for the replaced MELSECNET H board according to the  Refer to Chapter 7   PARAMETER SETTING   channel numbers and parameter settings recorded before the replacement  Section 9 2 2  Board list screen operation        Perform offline tests of MELSECNET H board   Refer to Section 6 6   Offline Tests     Execute user program or each utility   Refer to Chapter 9   Utility Operation    Refer to Chapter 10   MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY     Complete            App   3 App   3    APPENDIX MELSEC        2  Precautions   When a MELSECNET H board is replaced  channel numbers are automatically  re assigned  For details on the channel number to be assigned  refer to  APPENDIX 1   As parameter settings  Refer to Chapter 7  correspond to channel numbers  the  replaced board works with the parameter settings shown below   e When un used channel numbers are newly assigned    Works with the default status   e When channel numbers that were used are assigned    Works with the parameter settings corresponding to the channel numbers   When replacing a MELSECNET H
203. nd cable possible  30cm or shorter      Twist the ground cable leading to the ground point with the power supply  cable  By twisting it with the ground cable  the noise leaking from the power  supply cable may be grounded at a higher rate  However  twisting the  power supply cable with the ground cable may not be necessary if a noise  filter is installed on the power supply cable     5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE       5 1 3 Cables    MELSEC    Use a shielded cable for the cable extended out of the control panel     If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly  the noise immunity will not  meet the required value      1  Grounding a shield cable     a      b     Ground the shield of the shield cable as near the exit as possible from the  control panel     If the ground point is not near the outlet  the cables after the ground point    will cause electromagnetic induction  and will generate a higher harmonic  noise     Ground the exposed shield to large area on the control panel  A clamp fitting  can be used as shown below     In this case  mask off the inner wall surface of the control panel  where  comes in contact with the fitting   Screw        Clamp fitting    Paint mask    Grounding with a vinyl coated wire soldered onto the shield of the shielded cable as  shown below is not recommended     Doing so will raise the high frequency impedance  resulting in loss of the shielding    effect         __ Crimp terminal        2  Treatment of the coaxial cable groun
204. nnel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot          Block 1 setting       m Data Setting          Send Range Setting for Each Station    Total Station je Sta No   a Set   dran  2000 H w Banga  LX  1400   j   BFF B      400 5  15FF  Send Ra   1 0 Master Sta  fT iM lt  L1LX LY fiaoo  fsf    lt  fi400       i5FF    r  Send Range for Each Station   Send Range M  gt L  Send Range M lt  L     Stano  feya m demo tv  a    Change    j2 1000 lt   gt 11FF 1000 lt   gt 11FF 1000 lt   gt 11FF 1000 lt   gt 11FF    1200 lt   gt 13FF 1200 lt   gt 13FF 1200 lt   gt 13FF 1200 lt   gt 13FF  4   1400k  gt 15FF  1400 lt   gt 15FF 1400 lt   gt 15FF 1400 lt   gt 15FF Delete    Setting Clear                                       Check  Lox   Cancel   Help          3  Precaution  Duplicate link device ranges cannot be assigned to each station between block 1  and block 2   If the network module is the I O master station  they must be set not to duplicate  with the actual I O  the range of input output numbers to which the actual module  is installed  of the of the CPU module mounted     CPU device Link device       LX LY settings  2     lt  lt   Duplicate       Duplicate    gt     Block 2    Seta 7FFH                      7 PARAMETER SETTIN  Z   MELSEC       7 3 3 Total station    This sets the total number of control stations  normal stations and reserved stations in  a single network    Set the total number of link stations in the  Common parameter settings  screen in the  MNETH utility        Total station  8 M
205. ntees are not applicable in station units  it  is necessary to establish an interlock    For the direct access setting  set it in the  Driver  in the MNETH utility     The direct access of the link devices LX LY is limited to the communication with the    block I O master station set with the common parameters  By limiting the  communication  data cannot be shared among multiple stations  such as link device  LB LW  but 1 1 communication between predefined stations is allowed        12 1 12 1    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC       12 2 Low Speed Cyclic Transmission Function    The Q00J Q00 Q01CPU does not support the low speed cyclic transmission    function  Therefore  the low speed cyclic transmission function cannot be used in  MELSECNETHH that connects the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU        The low speed cyclic transmission function is convenient when sending data that does  not require high speed transfer to other stations in a batch mode using the cyclic  devices  LB LW     A station can transmit data only once in a single link scan  Simultaneous data  transmission from multiple stations requires more scan time than the following   Low speed cyclic link scan time   normal link scan time x  number of send stations     1    In the low speed cyclic transmission  send range for each station is set with the   Common parameters setting  B  W setting   screen of the MNETH utility     B W setting   X Y setting   Reserved station setting   Supplementary setting                 Channel  5
206. nternal conductor     Solder here          5  Insert the connector assembly in 4  into the plug shell and screw the  nut into the plug shell      1  Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and  contact       Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section     Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or    they do not cut into each other   e Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become  deformed    2  Before connecting or disconnecting the coaxial connector  touch a grounded  metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body  Failure to  do so may result ina MELSECNET H board malfunction        6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION       MELSEC     2  Using a BNC connector manufactured by Canare Electric Co   Ltd     The following explains how to connect the BCP C3B  BCP C5B  or BCP C5FA to  the cable      a  Structure of the BNC connector and coaxial cable    Structure of the coaxial cable  Components of the BNC connector    External conductor  SY E gt  27 Insulating material   Outer sheath    Crimp sleeve Center contact pin       Internal conductor     b  How to connect the BNC connector and the coaxial cable    1  Thread a coaxial cable through a crimping sleeve as shown in the  figure below     When using a cable with aluminum tape  cut the tape as shown in the  figure below     Crimp sleeve       Unit  mm  inches     When cutting the tape
207. ock No  1    DeviceNo     C HEX   DEC C oct fo      Setting Data    C HEX   DEC  10    ona      Item Content    Device Type Set a type of a device whose value is to be changed      Enter a block number for ER      Enter a network number for LW and LSW    e Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG   Device No  Set a number of a device whose value is to be changed     HEX  Hexadecimal  DEC  Decimal  OCT  Octal    Setting Data Enter a value to be changed     HEX  Hexadecimal  DEC  Decimal       WARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the entire system  works Safely at all times for data change control to the programmable controller in  operation    Also  determine corrective actions for an event of data communication error  between the PC and programmable controller CPU in use        9 UTILITY OPERATIONS       MELSEC    9 3 7 Changing word device values continuously      WARNING    Change the specified word device value for the number of specified points being set      1  Selecting the menu  Select  Device write     Continuous Change in Data  from the menu bar      2  Dialog box  xl    Device Type    Device Type  SPG special direct buffer register   Start  O No 16 DEC  2                DeviceNo     C HEX   DEC C ocT fo      Setting Data    C HEX    DEC 1 4       Points    C HEX   DEC cCocT Ts     cene    Device Type Set a type of a devices whose values are to be changed     Enter a block number for ER     Enter a network
208. ode returned to request source during communication with CPU  module  in the QCPU User s Manual  Hardware Design  Maintenance  and Inspection      2  Execute retry processing as required depending on the system  specifications     App   6 App   6    APPENDIX       MELSEC     4  Automatic switching of communication route  If a communication error occurs during access to the Redundant CPU connected  to MELSECNET H  the communication route is automatically switched to  continue access to the control system   Hereinafter  this automatic switching of the communication route is referred to as  route switching     The following describes the route switching conditions  how to check for route  switching occurrence  and access to the control system by route switching      a  Route switching conditions  When access is being made under the following conditions  access to the  Redundant CPU is continued by route switching if a communication error  occurs     lm  ns Conditions for continued access    Operation mode Backup mode  Separate mode  Target system Control system  Standby system  System A  System B    However  if a tracking error  1 had already occurred at a start of  communication  access to the control system is not continued by route  switching even if tracking is recovered after that     x1  Includes the status in which either Redundant CPU is powered off or  reset         b  How to check whether route switching occurred or not and  examples of access by route switching    1  
209. oft   Windows Server   2003 R2  Enterprise Edition Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Server   2003 R2  Standard x64 Edition Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Server   2003 R2  Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Vista   Home Basic Operating System  Operating system Microsoft   Windows Vista   Home Premium Operating System   English version   1 2 Microsoft   Windows Vista   Business Operating System   Microsoft   Windows Vista   Ultimate Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Vista   Enterprise Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Server   2008 Standard Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Server   2008 Enterprise Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Server   2008 Standard x64 Edition Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Server   2008 Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Server   2008 R2 Standard Operating System  Microsoft   Windows Server   2008 R2 Enterprise Operating System  Microsoft   Windows   7 Home Premium  32 bit version   64 bit version  Operating  System  Microsoft   Windows   7 Professional  32 bit version   64 bit version  Operating System  Microsoft   Windows   7 Ultimate  32 bit version   64 bit version  Operating System  Microsoft   Windows   7 Enterprise  32 bit version   64 bit version  Operating System    Display Resolution  800 x 600 dot or higher  Recommended  1024 x 768 dot     Available hard disk space 80MB or more    CD ROM disk drive    PCI Express    Bus specifications       2 SYSTEM CONFIGU
210. ollers  Ensure a distance of 100mm   3 94 in   between them  Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise  surge or  induction    e Always ground the personal computer  Failure to do so may cause malfunction         Startup Maintenance Instructions     ZA WARNING    e Do not attach or remove the communication cable while the power supply is on   This may result in malfunctioning    e Tighten the board fixing screws after turning off the power supply   There is a risk of electric shock if the screws are tightened while power is on     ZA CAUTION    e Thoroughly read the operating manual and carefully check to make sure everything is safe  before performing operations such as making changes to the program while the module is  operating  forced outputs  RUN  STOP and PAUSE     Operation errors will result in damage to the equipment or accidents    e Do not dismantle or rebuild the board   This will result in breakdowns  malfunctioning  injury or fire    e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before installing  or removing the board   If all power is not turned off  this will result in failure of the board or malfunctioning    e The board internal microprocessor reaches very high temperatures when it is running  Do not  touch it directly when replacing the board   This will result in breakdowns  malfunctioning or injury    e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body   etc   be
211. onnection     a  How to connect the cable    MELSEC    Connect the IN and OUT terminals with optical fiber cables as shown below   Stations do not have to be connected in the order of station numbers   Any station number can be assigned as the control station     Control station    Station  No  1               Personal  computer    Q80BD   71LP21 2  TT     Power supply    Normal station    Station  No  2    Normal station    Station    No  n n  lt  64    Power supply           b  Installing the optical fiber cable  The following shows how to install the optical fiber cable          Start  Installation       Power off the personal computer and external power  supply                         Insert the plug by aligning the groove of the plug with  the projection of the jack     Push the plug in until the plug fixing hole catches the  hook of the jack        Pull the plug lightly in the direction of the arrow to make  sure that it is securely connected       Complete            Jack    Projection    Q80BD  A  J71LP21 25    K           c  Removing the optical fiber cable  The following shows how to remove the optical fiber cable          Start  Removal       Power off the personal computer and external power  supply     Press the fixed sections of the plug in the directions of    the arrows and pull out the plug     y  Put the covers  which were attached to the plug before  installation  back on both the plug and jack to store     y    Complete                     Data link operat
212. onnector are not dedicated to IN and OUT   A coaxial cable can be connected to either of them     A terminal resistor can be placed on either side of the F type connector              6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC        b  Installing the coaxial cable  The following shows how to install the coaxial cable     Start  Installation     Power off the personal computer    Plug    Insert the plug by aligning the groove of the plug with  the projection of the jack     Q80BD J71BR11             Projection       Groove    Rotate the plug in the direction of the arrow  clockwise   securely to the position shown in the second figure from       above     Complete           c  Removing the coaxial cable  The following shows how to remove the coaxial cable     Start  Removal     y    Power off the personal computer       y  Rotate the plug in the direction of the arrow and  unhook it     Hold the plug by hand and pull it out in the direction of  the arrow as shown in the bottom diagram     Complete             Q80BD J71BR11                          d  Terminal reisistor  Coaxial bus system needs the terminal resistor at the both ends of the  network   The user need to arrange the terminal resistor  A6RCON R75  as it is not  included in Q80BD J71BR11     6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       6 4 3 Connecting the connector for the coaxial cable    The following section explains how to attach the BNC connector  connector plug for  
213. ore than 16 items  items will be erased from the history   starting with the oldest one    From old to new  No  1 to No  16      2  Refer to the following manuals for details on the error code and error type of a  specific transient transmission error that may be displayed     Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual  PLC  to PLC network     For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual       PA MELSECNET H utility Bee    Board list   Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status Err history monitor   Memory 10 Test  Target all         Channel   51 MELSECNETH  1 slot        Dwn Station Information Error Count  Network No  Group No  Sta No  Control   Normal Sta  Loop Switching  5  1 fo fi Control Sta     Transient Transmission  O  FLoop R Loop    Retry  225 fo  Link Trouble fi fi         Loop Switching           No   Changing          Changing cause Status after changed  Reverse loop HAW er Loop back  Forward loop HAW err Full duplex comm                 Indication of Loop back Communication Error  Indication of Loop back UNDER   fo po  Ta miraran I  crc      Transient Transmission Error OVER fo fo  No  Err code  Em type  amp  Short Frame ji ji  1 Abort HENI HEN    ins    fo fo  Ree oem KEK    DPLL Error fo j                           Device Monitor    Own Station Information Displays the host information     Displays the loop change factors and status after changing     Sets the channel  MELSECNET H board  perform error history monitor     
214. ored in  the link data storage area  LB     4  By a link scan  the BO information in the link data storage area  LB  is  stored in the link data storage area  LB  of the network module on the  receiving station    5  The BO information in the link data storage area  LB  is stored in the  refresh data storage area  LB     6  By a link refresh  the BO information is stored in the device memory  storage area  B  of the CPU module    7  BO on the receiving station turns on     7        Sending station  Personal computer  Receiving station  Programmable controller     Personal computer MELSECNET H board Network module QCPU                   i  i  1 1  1  BO turns i   4   ON s H Link scan   j j  i  i i  j  i    MELSECNET H  2  Refresh data Link data      Link data Refresh data 6  Device               driver buffer storage area storage area 1 1 storage area storage area memory  Writing  2 f  3    3 i  3 storage area    Sequence scan  i  I        User program    Link refresh Link refresh   4                                                                       1  The link refresh interval is set on the  Driver  screen in the MNETH Utility     2  Set by the GX Developer s  Station Inherent Parameters    If not set  they are stored in the common  parameters state      3  If the MELSECNET H board is a control station  it is set in the  Common Parameter Setting    screen in  the MNETH Utility  If the network module is a control station  it is set in the GX Developer   s  Common  Paramete
215. ork can be checked with the link special relay register   SB SW    Use them as interlocks for programs   For interlock program examples  refer to the following manual    Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System   Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network     Link special relays and registers    Link special ie Signal status     Description  relaylregister    Indicates the communication status between  MELSECNETIH board and personal computer   Shows the baton pass execution status of the The baton pass is   The baton pass is    Abnormal       host  being executed stopped    SB49 Shows the cyclic transmission status of the host     Shows the baton pass execution status of all j  j   j   The baton pass is Occurrence of  stations  including the host   However  it only i E    SB70    being executed on   communication  shows the status for the number of stations set i     i all stations stop station  with parameters     Shows the baton pass execution status of each   station  The baton pass is   The baton pass is  SW70 to 73 i i   Each bit corresponds to the status of each being executed stopped   station     Shows the cyclic transmission status of all  SB74 stations  including the host   However  it only All stations Occurrence of   shows the status for the number of stations set normal abnormal station  with parameters   Shows the cyclic transmission status of each   sw74to77 TAn Abnormal  Each bit corresponds to the status of each  station     Shows the low speed cyclic transmissio
216. ort and    Channel 51 MELSECNET H  1 slot      the char  nel of the remainder is used the  MELSE ABT Board r Link Device Access Method Setting  1 0 Port   Link Refresh  SONY Interval  1 Link Scan Times      Direct Access                   r  Watch Dog Timer Monitoring Time Setting r Transient Timeout Monitoring Time Setting    Current Value Setting Value Current Value Setting Value      250   8 ms  8 ms   15 sec  sec   Device Monitor               Content    But Enables the setting contents   et   Button  The channel No  settings are reassigned after the button is clicked     Default Value   Button Returns the set contents to the default values     Carries out settings in the case that a MELSECNET 10 board is used in the same  personal computer as the MELSECNET H board  For details concerning combination  settings with the MELSECNET 10 board  refer to  Appendix 1  Channel No  Assignment  Method       The channel is used with the Select if the MELSECNET 10 board installed in  MELSECNET H board  the personal computer is not used  default      Combination settings with The channel is used from channel 51  MELSECNET 10 board with the MELSECNET 10 board  detected automatically and the    Select if all the MELSECNET 10 boards installed  in the personal computer are used    enannel 6f theremainder is useathe Use the channels not used by the MELSECNET   MELSECNET H board  10 boards with the MELSECNET H board     The channel is used from channel 51  Select if only designated MELSECNET
217. ossibility that of a white oxidation product forming on the type F  connector due to the use environment  but it does not occur on the portions  that are fitted together  so functionally  there will be no problem      g  When attaching or detaching the coaxial cable to from the module  make  sure to power off the personal computer        6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC        2  Cable connection     a  Connection method  Connect the coaxial cable as shown below   Always install a terminal resistor  sold separately  AGRCON R75  to the  stations connected at both ends   The F type connector comes with the Q80BD J71BR11     1  Without a repeater module        Normal station Normal station   Station No  2 Station No  n n  lt 32  Control station QJ71BR11 QJ71BR11  Station No  1         Personal  computer        F type connector F type connector F type connector           Yy                                  es    7  Terminal resistor Terminal resistor  A6RCON R75 Coaxial cable A6RCON R75     sold separately            sold separately     2  With a repeater module  series connection                  Normal station Normal station Normal station  Control station Station No  2 Station No  3 Station No  n ns32  Station No  1 QJ71BR11 QJ71BR11  Personal  F type connector F type connector    computer F type connector                                     Terminal resistor Coaxial cable Terminal resistor    Coaxial cable       A6RCON R75 A6RCON R75   sold separa
218. ot    External  power    suppl  PEN 0 50 to 1 25 mm     AWG 20 16     0 10 kg 0 20 kg 0 11 kg       PECIFICATION  3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC        1  The CPU usage may be higher compared to that of Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BDJ71LP21G   Q80BD J71LP21GE  or Q80BD J71BR11   For the solutions to slow PC performance  refer to Section 14 8     x2  MELSECNET H board communications rate and Mode settings are performed using the MNETH Utility    For details  refer to Section 9 2 3     3  L type and H type of the previous optical fiber cable  A 2 L  differ in the distances between stations   For details  refer  to Section 6 4 1      gt 4  The number of boards that can be installed is the combined number of MELSECNET H boards and MELSECNET 10  boards   When using the Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25 or Q80BD J71LP21S 25 at a communication speed of  25Mbps  errors may occur at all stations if multiple boards with the same network number are installed  or the  operating systems are started up shut down or the boards are reset simultaneously on the adjacent personal  computers  In this case  set the communication speed to 10Mbps      2  Q80BD J71BR11      Specifications  tem  Q80BD J71BR11    3 LX LY 8192 Points  Maximum links    H Aneto 16384 Points  When in the MELSECNET 10 Mode   1  8192 Points   16384 Points  When in the MELSECNET 10 Mode     8192 Points     MELSECNET H mode  MELSECNET 10 mode        LY   LB    8    2 x LW    lt  2000 bytes    MELSECNET H Extended mode  
219. ot Operate Normallv                                          14  5   14 3 1 Table of error event messages that may occur during driver startup                                           14  7  14 4 Flowchart to Use when Data Link is not Achieved                iiiiE kk kk k keke k kK kk YR 14  9  14 4 1 Flowchart to use when RUN LED is unlit               L kk k kek kek K  k k kK kk kK 14 10  14 4 2 Flowchart to use when SD RD LED does not turn On              iiiiiEE kk kk ek   kk kk kk 14 11  14 4 3 Flowchart to use when L ERR  LED turns On         l lhk  lE  illdiiE kk kek   kk kek   KK K  k KAR k 14 12  14 4 4 Flowchart to use when unable to achieve data link for entire system                                          14 13  14 4 5 Flowchart to use when unable to achieve data link for specific station                                       14 15    14 5 Flowchart to Use when Error Occurred During Data Link                 u kk kk ke 14 17    14 5 1 Flowchart to use when unexpected value is input to specific link device                                    14 17  14 5 2 Flowchart to use when data cannot be written or read in user program                                     14 17  14 5 3 Flowchart to use when communication is disabled from time to time during user program  CXOCULION eia eden eesti a eile in id einen slide in  o    mme 14 18  14 5 4 Flowchart to use when system reset or system hang up occurred in operating system            14 19  14 5 5 Precautions for installin
220. oth the optical loop system  Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25   Q80BD J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE  and the  coaxial bus system  Q80BD J71BR11  in common  If the following LED s light up  it means that the corresponding error has  occurred  so replace the MELSECNET H board    1   CRC  LED lights up  e  ROM Check Error  2   OVER  LED lights up      RAM Check Error  3   AB IF  LED lights up     Timer  interrupt function check error    b  Optical loop system  Q80BD J71LP21 25  Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD   J71LP21S 25  Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE  only  1   TIME  LED lights up     Forward loop broken line check error  2   DATA  LED lights up    Reverse loop broken line check error    6   26 6   26    6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       6 6 Offline Tests    The offline tests check the cable connection status of the network module and  MELSECNET H board     This section explains concerning the MELSECNET H board    Refer to the following manuals concerning network module settings      Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual  PLC to  PLC network       QnA Q4AR Corresponding MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual    6 6 1 Station to station test    In the station to station test  the hardware of the MELSECNET H board  network  modules and cables between two adjacent stations can be checked   The following explains how to conduct the station to station test      1  Connecting the cable     a  Optical loop syst
221. ow to set the network     3  Data format Shows the display form and device types being displayed     word device and bit device    Refer to Section 9 3 5 on how to change the device type   And  refer to Section 9 3 9 on how to change the display form        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 3 4 Setting the monitoring destination    Sets the network to be used for device monitoring   Set the destination when starting the device monitor utility      1  Selecting the menu  Select  Setting     Network Setting  from the menu bar      2  Dialog box    Network Setting   x             Channel   s1 MELSECNETIH1     H  1 slot  x   r Network Setting         C Own Sta     Other Sta     Network No  ay  Sta No  e      omea      channel set the channel to be used     Network Setting Set the own and other stations along with network number and  station number     Logical Sta  No  Set the logical station number      1  In case of accessing to the multiple CPU  select other station  and enter  0  to  the network No  and value of  logical station number  which set in the MNETH  utility to the station number     2  When own station is selected in the network setting  network No   0  and station  No   255  are displayed as the network status        9 UTILITY OPERATIONS                                        MELSEC  9 3 5 Setting the device to be monitored  Set the device to be monitored    1  Selecting the menu  Select  Setting     Device setting  from the menu bar    2  Dialog box  For batc
222. owing explains the error causes and the corresponding corrective actions   In addition to Error history monitor screen  they can be confirmed using the following link special registers  SW   For  more information of each link special registers  SW   refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System  Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network      Link special  Item Error cause Corrective action  register    Loop Switching  SWOOCEH Power ON OFF status of the station  cable fault  noise  etc  a a    Confirm the error code of  Power ON OFF status or CPU module error of the external the transient transmission  station  cable fault  noise  etc  error  and then take the   corrective action     SWO0C8H    i   Retry Power ON OFF status of the station  cable fault  noise  etc   2  SWO00C9H   j SW00CCH   Power ON OFF status of the adjacent station  cable fault  noise    Link Trouble x2  SW00CDH etc   SWOOB8H         UNDER Power ON OFF status of the adjacent station  cable fault  etc  x2  SWOOCOH  SWOOB9h  Disconnection status of the station that sends data to the  SW00C1H corresponding station  cable fault  hardware error  noise  etc   SWOOBAH    OVER  SWO00C2H   Cable fault  Hardware error  noise  etc    SWOOBBH    Short Frame  SW00C3H   Abort SWOOBCH   Disconnection status of the station that sends data to the   O   SWO0C4H corresponding station  cable fault  hardware error  noise  etc   SWOOBDh    Time Out Insufficient data link monitor time  cable fault  noise  etc   SWO00C5H    j SWO
223. ows   95   Windows   98  and Windows NT     Change the configuration to a single    processor configuration with the boot options of the PC BIOS setting or the  operating system            2  Instructions for operating system    a  Supported version of SWODNC MNETH B  Supported version of SWODNC MNETH B  Q80BD J71LP21 25   Operating system Q80BD J71LP21S 25   Q80BD J71LP21G Q81BD J71LP21 25  Q80BD J71LP21GE    Q80BD J71BR11       Windows   95  Windows   98  j  Windows NT   All versions  Not supported        Windows   2000 All versions Version 19V or later       Windows   XP Version 70H or later Version 19V or later  Windows Server   2003 R2  32 bit version  Version 19V or later  Windows Server   2003 R2  64 bit version  Version 23Z or later  Windows Vista   Version 17T or later Version 19V or later  Windows Server   2008  32 bit version  Version 21X or later  Windows Server   2008  64 bit version       Windows Server   2008 is Version 22 ON                          Windows   7  32 bit version  Version 21X or later  Windows   7  64 bit version  Version 23Z or later   b  User authority  Log on as a user having administrator authority   Installation  uninstallation and usage of utilities are available only by the  administrator s authority              2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  MELSEC        c  The functions cannot be used   The following functions of operating system cannot be used  If an attempt is   made to use any of the following functions  this product may not operate   norm
224. pecify   Drivers Win2000 x86  of the CD ROM drive to be       oF ee ee used for  Copy manufacturer s files from    eme    Example   D  Drivers Win2000 x86      Click the button     Copy manufacturer s files from     D  Drivers win2000 x86    Browse            l    Found New Hardware Wizard Ci New Hardware Wizard x  4  When the screen shown left is displayed  specify  Co Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive   Drivers Win2000 x86 Us  of the CD ROM drive to be used for   amp  M u ek of te a    Cancel    Copy files from       Example   D  Drivers Win2000 x86 Us    Click the button        Copy manufacturer s fles from   1  If the installation does not start after clicking the  D  Drivers Win2000 x864 Us    Browse         button  click the button   l specify   Drivers Win2000 x86 Us  Amneth2k sys  directly      ana  and then click the button        8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE  MELSEC        c  Using Windows   XP  Windows   2003 R2    Found New Hardware Wizard 1  The  Found New Hardware Wizard  screen is displayed     Welcome to the Found New    Hardware Wizard Select  Install from a list or specific location  Advanced   and    This wizard helps you install software for  click the button     Network Controller         If your hardware came with an installation CD       or floppy disk  insert it now        What do you want the wizard to do   Oinstallthe so       insta iom a ist or specific location  Advanced     Click Next to continue     
225. plays errors from the first error log     C Initial time and Date Specification    99 07116 El 22 25 42 E  e Displays errors from the designated date         Display Condition    karin akan Displays errors until the last error log   Latest time and Date Specificatior    99 071186   22 23 27 E                    Displays errors until the designated date                 Source Name  No Seting z                _ Displays errors having only the designated source name           Error No                 _     Displays errors having only the designated error number              Cancel Help              Search the error information of the source name and error code  from the error log data currently being displayed  using the dialog  box shown below   Pressing the F3 key will do the same     Specifies the name of the source to be searched        Source Name No Setting          Search Next  Searches the next    TES error information        Help H        Inputs the error code to be searched                 9 UTILITY OPERATIONS       MELSEC       Displays the details of the error log currently being selected   Pressing  Enter  after selecting a display item will do the same      Detail of Error Log  Classification   Driver  Date g9 07 16  Error No  1281  Time 22 25 42 Continuity ON          Source Name   MCCLINKI    Message contents    ntialize error    PR er Failed to initialize the VF board  E   fabie Sheain     Displays the details of the error           Data Contents Detail         
226. pment from Mitsubishi  the maximum distribution period shall be six  6  months  and  the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be  42  months  The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall  not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs      Gratis Warranty Range     1  The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state  usage methods and usage environment  etc    which follow the conditions and precautions  etc   given in the instruction manual  user s manual and caution labels  on the product     2  Even within the gratis warranty term  repairs shall be charged for in the following cases    1  Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling  carelessness or negligence by the user  Failure caused  by the user s hardware or software design    2  Failure caused by unapproved modifications  etc   to the product by the user    3  When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device  Failure that could have been avoided if functions  or structures  judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary  by industry standards  had been provided    4  Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts  battery  backlight  fuse  etc   designated in the  instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced    5  Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages  and Failure caused by force  majeure such as earthquakes  lightning  wind and water da
227. process of send data is completed normally at the sending side   but data are discarded     12 23 12 23    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       12 24    MELSEC       Driver    Reception buffer of driver       Received data of Channel 3       Received data of Channel    Board       Received data of Channel       Channel 2 Received data ol             CI 7   CI 1  Sending station Channel 1   Channel 5   CI 4    nanne        Data sent from Channel 3 Received data o     other station by Channel 4    the SEND    t N Channel 5  instruction Channel 6          Channel 7 Received data of Channel 2                   Channel 8                   Received data can be stored  up to 128 disregarding the  channel numbers                    X Received data of Channel 6    Discards received data     lt  Precautions for using RECV function  gt      When receiving data to the multiple channels of the board  create a user  program to read data from all channels that receive data    If a channel from which data are not read exists in the channel from  which data are received  the received data of the channel from which  data are not read are accumulated in the reception buffer of the driver  and all areas of 128 data are occupied    In this case  the received data of other channels cannot be read  because the driver automatically discards subsequent data received by  the board      when attempting data read by executing the mdReceive function  immediately after the send data completion at the sending st
228. program and activate  the MNETH utility              la  y       Select  Board Information  screen and  identify the error type from LED status               YES       Is the error type  PRM E               Check for the following error causes    1  Duplication of station No  for MELSECNET H board    2  Coexistence of any different network types within the same network    3  In the case of MELSECNET H Extended mode  use of the  MELSECNET H board of ROM version 2X or later    For checking the ROM version  refer to Appendix 7    4  Error code stored in SW0055   1            NO               y    Select  Loop monitor  screen       Is forward loop normal     Check the cable for the host forward loop              Remove the error cause s              Check the cable for the host reverse loop              Did the data link begin        Consult with dealer regarding the problem          Complete       1  For the error code in SW0055  refer to the  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference    Manual  PLC to PLC network     The error code in SW0085 can be also checked by monitoring SD85 with Device Monitor Utility   Refer to    Section 9 3      14 12 14 12    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       14 4 4 Flowchart to use when unable to achieve data link for entire system       An error occurs         NO        Is parameter set  to the control station        Set the parameter   YES        NO YES    Did the data link begin          Is the control  station mode set to  On
229. ps  is connected     Transmission Speed       TILITY OPERATION  i Z 2 MELSEC       Selects the network where the MELSECNET H board is connected  When  25 Mbps  is  selected in the transmission speed item above  this item cannot be selected     Net Mode  NET mode MNET H Mode Selected when the MELSECNET H is connected   MNET 10 Mode Selected when the MELSECNET 10 is connected     MELSECNET H   Selected when the MELSECNETH H is connected and  Extended mode  1 MELSECNET H Extended mode is used     Designates by station type when a control station reconnects   This item is displayed on the screen and can be selected only when the MELSECNET H  board is a control station     Reconnect Description      _ Causes the MELSECNET H board to reconnect as a control  Return as control station station    Causes the MELSECNET H board to reconnect as a normal  station     Display the operation status of the MELSECNET H board     LED name LED status  RUN Normal data link  MNG Control station  S MNG _  Sub control station  D LINK      During data link  T PASS  Baton pass execution      SW E Switch setting error  M S E  Duplicate error on station number and swe  OOTPASS  control station MSE OS  PRM E   Parameter error crc        OVER       CRC Code check error  OVER Data entry delay error  AB IF All receiving data are 1   TIME Time over  DATA Reception data error  UNDER  Transmission data error  LOOP Forward reverse loop receiving error  SD Data being transmitted  Data being received    Displays t
230. ransmission function    7    Communication FUNCTION              eee Ek   Section 12 3 1   Non periodical communication  Routing function     ess esses esses eeeees reee errerer ereke Section 12 3 2  Group fUNCHION EZ J n Section 12 3 3  SEND RECV function Section 12 3 4  Multiple transmission function  optical loop system  s   rere treet terete teeter rrr kerek rere kerre Section 12 4  Redundant CPU system function  1 Pairing setting     1 teerseereetee tte t tte teen etteette ee r kk rr rek KH HH Section 7 3 6   1  For application of the redundant CPU system to the Q corresponding  MELSECNETHH  refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System  Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network     4 1 4 1    4 FUNCTION MELSEC       4 2 Specifications of the Link Data Sending Receiving Processing Time    This section explains the link data sending receiving processing in the MELSECNET H  network system with MELSECNET H board     4 2 1 Link data sending receiving processing     1  Link data sending receiving processing  In the cyclic transmission  communication is performed using the LB LW LX LY  devices of the network module and MELSECNET H board   This section explains the case when the link relay  B  is used on the personal  computer side     1  BO on the sending station  personal computer  turns on    2  By a link refresh  the BO information is stored in the refresh data  storage area  LB  of the MELSECNET H board    3  The BO information in the refresh data storage area  LB  is st
231. red value     Click the button        Device W 0017  CHEX o  123  4          omeo         3  Select in the dialog box shown below if the change is acceptable   Select to cancel the operation         Device Monitor Utility      Change the device W 0017 to 123   All right     Yes      WARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the entire system    works Safely at all times for data change control to the programmable controller in  operation     Also  determine corrective actions for an event of data communication error  between the PC and programmable controller CPU in use        TILITY OPERATION  _     2 MELSEC        2  Bit device  The following explains how to turn on off the bit device   However  this operation is available only when the display orientation is  Portrait      1  Double click the number of the bit device to be changed        2  Select in the dialog box shown below if the change is acceptable     Select to cancel     Device Monitor Utility         Change the device X 0017 to ON   All right         Yes     N WARNING e Configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the entire system  works safely at all times for data change control to the programmable controller in    operation   Also  determine corrective actions for an event of data communication error    between the PC and programmable controller CPU in use        9 UTILITY OPERATIONS       MELSEC    9 4 Error Viewer Operation    The following explains how to set
232. reen  Right click on     Network Controller  and select  Update Driver Software      2  Click  Browse my computer for driver software      3  Specify the driver software for  Search for driver software in    this location  according to the following information  and click  the button      lt For 32 bit version operating system     gt   Specify   Drivers Win2000 x86  of the CD ROM drive to be  used   Example   D  Drivers Win2000 x86       lt For 64 bit version operating system     gt   Check  Include this location in the search  and specify    Drivers Win2000 x64  of the CD ROM drive to be used    Example   D  Drivers Win2000 x64     1  The operating system can be checked by Windows system  information   For details  refer to the Microsoft   Knowledge Base   http   support microsoft com kb 827218   As of August 2011     8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE  MELSEC        2  When installation is completed normally  When the installation is completed normally   PCI MELSECNET H Controller  is  displayed on the Windows   Device Manager screen     For Windows 7      is displayed next to the icon  however  the MELSECNET H  board is recognized normally     E         a Device Manager   File Action View Help   e  m i m     MEIWO0342   J Computer       ca Disk drives   E Display adapters    lt a DVD CD ROM drives    lt  Floppy disk drives   ee Floppy drive controllers   ca   IDE ATA ATAPI controllers      IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers     Jungo    BB      Keyboards  je  M
233. remove the error cause    e Check the Redundant CPU for an error    e Check the tracking cable status and whether the tracking cable is  correctly connected    e Check the relevant network module for an error and the network  where the relevant network module is connected for an error     App   7    APPENDIX MELSEC       2  Examples of access by route switching  The following shows examples of route switching during access to the  control system      lt When system switching occurs at communication error gt           Personal computer i   MELSECNETIH board  Connection to control system                                        Standby system                                        Tracking cable                      Personal computer p   MELSECNET H board  Connection to control system                           MELSECNET H       Standby system Control system    Fig  1 Route switching example 1                      Tracking cable        lt When standby system fault occurs gt        Personal computer     MELSECNET H board  Connection to control system                                            Standby system  y__  error  gt                                      Personal computer z   MELSECNET H board  Connection to control system                MELSECNET H       Control system                               Tracking cable       Fig  2 Route switching example 2    App   8 App   8    APPENDIX MELSEC         POINT _      e Route switching is not executed if a communication error has alre
234. rk number cannot be designated more  than once  multiple   Therefore  the host can become the request source or  can be accessed to other station through the host with 64 types of different   Transfer to Network No        Setting item Valid setting range      MELSECNETZH Routing Parameter Setting    m Data Setting             Transfer to Intermediate Intermediate  No  Network No  Network No  Sta No       Sa  Setting Data    Change    Delete            r  Channel   51 MELSECNETJH  1 slot          Fr Composition only of MELSECNET H network    Cancel   Help            Setting method    Set the routing parameters according to the procedure described below                                                                                                  Request  source  n  Network No  Relay station  A  N Network No O  Request  destination                   To access  network No       it is necessary to route through station No  Aof network No 1                                    y  Transisi Intermediate Intermediate  network No network No  station No   1 O o A  Can e a a a    12 15    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS  MELSEC        3  Settings for different network system configurations and setting  contents  The stations to set for the transient transmission and the contents of the routing  parameters vary depending on the system configuration    a  Single network system  It is not necessary to set the routing parameters for the transient transmission to  the same network     Request  sour
235. rmation screen for connection to  Windows   Update may be displayed    Select  No  not this time  and click the button        8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE       MELSEC     2  Using Windows Vista    Windows Server   2008  Windows   7       Screens Procedure    This screen is displayed when user account control is  enabled     Click  Allow  or the button        User Account Control exe       Y An unidentified program wants access to your computer    Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it  before     gi  Setup exe  l Unidentified Publisher    Cancel  I don t know where this program is from or what it s for     this program  I know where it s from or I ve used it before       V  Details    User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer              Hy  User Account Control  me          ga  Do you want to allow the following program from an   Z unknown publisher to make changes to this computer     Program name  Setup exe  Publisher  Unknown  File origin  Hard drive on this computer       V  Show details Yes                i     lt  lt     m  For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board  the power options of    Windows will be changed as follows after installing    Invalidating the sleep settings    Changing the settings of power button action in  shutdown    Do you continue the installation                                Click the button     MELSECPowerManager is installed and the  Windows   Power Options s
236. rror viewer      1  Windows   95  Windows   98    EventID Error content Corrective action   0 to FFFF     SER   The MELSECNETHH board is not loaded  or the I O address is   Change the I O address setting for the   101  overlapping with other hardware  MELSECNET H board or other hardware    1    258  1024  No response from hardware  Replace the MELSECNET H board     259  103r  The number of MELSECNET H boards detected exceeds the   Remove MELSECNET H boards until the number     maximum number that can be loaded  falls within the maximum limit     An attempt to perform interrupt registration has failed  board    Remove another option board    Take actions for the WDT error   Refer to Section  14 7      295  1271  A WDT error occurred on the board side  Replace the MELSECNET H board      2  Windows   XP  Windows   2000  Windows NT     Windows Vista      Windows   7    Event ID  gt  f   0 to FFFFn  Error content Corrective action  H      Failed to start the MELSEC network service   Failed to register the main thread of service  or failed to set  the service status     256  100   The driver could not be executed because an error occurred Reinstall the driver package  If the error still  i during driver startup  occurs  reinstall Windows      e The MELSECNETHH board is not loaded  or the I O address is   Change the I O address setting for the   1014  overlapping with other hardware  MELSECNET H board or other hardware    1  258  1024  No response from hardware  Replace the MELSECNE
237. rs      4  Set in the GX Developer   s  Network Refresh Parameters      4 FUNCTION MELSEC        2  Link scan and link refresh  The link scan is executed  asynchronous  with the sequence scan of the CPU  module   The link refresh is executed by the  END processing  of the CPU module        Sequence scan  0 END Ho END Ho END H0 END           Link refresh Link refresh Link refresh       Link scan        3  Link data when a communication error station or communication  stop station occurs on the network  When a communication error or communication stop station occur on the network  during the data link  the receive data from those stations immediately before the  error occurrence is retained    A  communication stop station  refers to a station whose cyclic transmission has  been stopped by a peripheral device       a  The receive data from a communication error station or communication stop  station is retained by a normally communicating station      b  The receive data from other station is retained by a communication stop  station      Example   When a communication error has occurred to 1Ns2 due to cable disconnection    Communication    Cable disconnection error station             1Ns3  Cable disconnection    aie Link data status after disconnection          4 FUNCTION MELSEC        4  SB SW when a communication error station communication stop   station occurs on the network  The status of whether there are any communication error communication stop  stations on the netw
238. rval for reading link device data from user program  n    Specified interval value  Tis   Link scan time    The following shows an example of accessing LBO under conditions  Tup    100ms  n   3  TLs   120ms   The maximum delay time  TD MAX  is    Tomax   100ms    3 1  x 10ms   120ms    Tomax        User program      Turp 100  Read timing i     4    MELSECNET H  driver buffer       Refresh data storage    area  LBO    l    a gl  n 1   x T  s 20ms    Link refresh   When n 3     Link scan              T  s 10ms       TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 3 Device Monitor Utility    The following explains how to set and operate the device monitor utility     In the device monitor utility  SB  Link special relay  and SW  Link special register   are indicated as SM and SD  respectively        9 3 1 Operation procedure    The following explains how to operate the device monitor utility     Select  Setting   Network setting  from the menubar   Refer to Section 9 3 4  and set the channel to be used           Set the device to be monitored  Refer to Section 9 3 5    be  AE selek method  device value or display Refer to Section 9 3 2  9 3 3   y  9 3 6  9 3 11          TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 3 2 Setting as batch monitoring  Monitors only one device that has been specified      1  Selecting the menu  Select  Menu     Batch monitoring  from the menu bar    Selectable for 16 point entry monitor only       2  Display screen      Device Monitor Utility  Menu Setting Device Wr
239. s entered on the personal computer    e The MELSECNET H board stops its operation and is disconnected from the network    e The board is not reconnected even after the personal computer returns from the power  save mode  hibernate  sleep     e     28141 9213H    System sleep error    occurs if a function is executed after the personal  computer enters the power save mode  hibernate  sleep      When the power save mode is enabled  the following dialog box is displayed and  the settings are changed automatically by MELSECPowerManager     n   j  MELSEC Interface Board        For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board  the power options of    Windows were changed as follows     Invalidating the sleep settings     Changing the settings of power button action in  shutdown                              For details of MELSECPowerManager  refer to Appendix 11        App   28 App   28    APPENDIX MELSEC       Appendix 11 MELSECPowerManager    MELSECPowerManager is a service application which monitors the Windows   Power  Options settings every 30 seconds to prevent the personal computer from entering the  power save mode  hibernate  sleep     MELSECPowerManager is applicable to Windows Vista     Windows Server   2008  and  Windows   7      When the Windows   Power Options settings are changed to enter the power save mode   hibernate  sleep   MELSECPowerManager changes the settings automatically     The following message which notifies the change of the settings appears when the  Windows  
240. s2   4Mp1    nr z1  C Network No  1 D Network No 2      Network No  3 Network No  4  PFT                                                                                 CH  1Ns3  Gate 4   PC j QCPU   1Ns4    QCPU  2Ns3 QCPU  3Me1         Network No  5     Gate 5        QCPU   5Ns2   6M  1                      Network No  6        Gate 6        Network No  7  E        Gate 7           QCPU  8Mp1    QCPU  9Ns2    QCPU  8Ns4    C Network No  9 D Network No  8  E TR    a     9Ns3 QCPU  9Mp1   8Ns2 QCPU          QCPU 8Ns3                                  12 11 12 11    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS        Transient transmission valid range   The following table shows the valid ranges of send receive by transient transmission  using the network configuration on the previous page   In the table below      O  and X indicate whether or not the transient transmission  between the request source  destination  listed in the column at the left and the  request destination  source  listed in the row at the bottom is possible    For example  the valid range between 9Ns2 of network number 9 and 1Ns2 of network  number 1 is indicated by O   1  communication is possible by designating a network  module that is close to the request source of the same programmable controller      Request source      gt   9Ns2 0 1   destination  477777  o          Possible    O  Possible by setting the routing parameter    X  Not possible    Request destination   source     MELSEC      1  Communication is possible by 
241. se when unable to achieve data link for  for specific station                   END    Refer to the following when the  T  PASS  LED lights up and goes out randomly    lt Cause gt   The line may have been in an unstable condition      lt Action gt   1  Check the connector for disconnection and the cable for breakage   2  Verify that the specified cable is used   3  Check that the overall extension cable length and station to station distance is  within the specified range        14 9 14 9    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       14 4 1 Flowchart to use when RUN LED is unlit    An error occurs                 Did the LED turn  off even when communication  with other station was being  performed        NO  The  RUN  LED has been off since the power was turned on    A                   Is there  a WDT  288  error log    remaining     YES    Lengthen the Watch dog timer monitoring  time  Refer to Section 14 7      YES    Complete               Did the  RUN   LED turn on after replacing the  MELSECNET H  board                 Is communication with  other station continued               NO  The  RUN  LED turned off    while communicating   Check PC hardware  etc                Replace the MELSECNET H board  since the MELSECNET H board s   RUN  LED is broken           1  WDT error logs can be checked on the following screens   e For Windows   95  Windows   98  The error viewer of the utility  Refer to Section 9 4    e For other than Windows   95  Windows   98  The event viewer
242. ses for slow PC operation   The MELSECNETHH driver refreshes link device data assigned to another station  from the refresh data storage area on the MELSECNETI H board to the  MELSECNETHH drive buffer  and those assigned to the host station from the  drive buffer to the refresh data storage area at specified intervals  X1  If more than one of the following causes occurs  the processing time for the  above link refresh is increased in the total PC processing and causes slow  operation    e Too many link device points are set for the entire network    e The link scan time value is too small    e The computational power of the PC is low    1  It indicates the case where Link Refresh is selected in the Link Device   Access Method setting on the MNETH utility   s  Driver  screen      2  Corrective measures  When the PC becomes slow  perform the following    e Increase the link refresh interval value on the MNETH utility   s  Driver   screen    e Set the constant link scan in Common parameter setting of the control  station    e Decrease the number of link device points in Common parameter setting of  the control station     14 24 14 24    14 TROUBLESHOOTING       MELSEC    14 9 Information Needed when Calling with Inquiry    14 25    The following conditions and status must be reported when calling us with an inquiry  regarding a damaged board      1     Error state  be specific   Example  The system does not start during the startup process after turning on  the power  displaying
243. set for the request source  and relay stations                    Required  Request Request    destination    source                  Relay station     gt      Network      1Ns6     1Ns5                                              Stations for which the routing  parameters are set    12 9    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       MELSEC    12 3 1 Communication function    12 10     1  Parameter settings  Set the execution conditions for the transient transmission with the parameters  listed below   In the default settings  both the number of transients that one network can  execute in one link scan   Maximum no  of transients in 1 scan   and the number  of transients that one station can execute in one link scan   Maximum no  of  transients in one station   are set to 2 times  Change the number of transients  that can be executed in a link scan as necessary  Refer to Points below      Setting value  Valid setting times Default setting  Setting item    Maximum no  of transients in 1 scan 1 to 255 times    Maximum no  of transients in one station 1 to 10 times Twice       MELSECNET H Common parameter setting  BW setting   XY setting   Reserved station setting Supplementary setting      7 Channel 51 MELSECNET H  1 slot           Constant Scan ms Specification of low speed cyclic transmission  Maximum No of retums to ee 5    Transmit data of one station in 1 scan  ions i    Station  system stations in 1 scan      Fixed term cycle interval setting E Sec     I With multiplex transmission 
244. sic   Search   Recent Items  Computer  Network   Con To  Control Panel  Default Programs    Help and Support             I 1 2            Control Panel Home    Get started with Windows  Back up your computer    Security  Check for updates    Firewall    Network and Internet  Connect to the Internet    View network status and tasks  Set up file sharing    Hardware and Sound    Printer  Mouse    Programs  Uninstall a program  Change startup programs    Mobile PC  Change battery settings             settings    System and Maintenance User Accounts   lt     Add or remove user accounts    Check this computer s security status  Allow a program through Windows    ni   l Ease of Access      Play CDs or other media automatically N Let Windows suggest settings    Adjust commonly used mobility E    Appearance and  y Personalization  Change desktop background  Customize colors  Adjust screen resolution       BH Clock  Language  and  LY Region    Change keyboards or other input  methods    m    Optimize visual display       Additional Options          Ren  Ill                                  l    Control Panel Home       HE     Classic View        m3 W  g    Add Administrativ AutoPlay  Hardware eTools    Device Folder  Manager Options       lt  4    iSCSIInitiator Keyboard Mouse    a oY    Personaliz    Phone and Power  Modem    Options    jal and Scanners and  Language    Cameras    q L    TabletPC Taskbar and  Settings Start Menu    u       Windows Windows Windows  Defender Firewall Mo
245. stem is started    Host station status  External PC    No  Status ower icati  p Communication Data link   3    x1  supply power   Loop status status  2    Loopback Abnormal  External power supply OFF before ON  Disconnected  Not executed  Ez External power supply ON before PC ERD  tart ON   startup  power  Normal Abnormal N  Pexeetied    PC startup  power ON  before  Disconnected   MELSECNET H driver startup    communication    When the personal computer is started    External PC Host station status  Status power    1   Communication RD  power   Loop status   2 Data link    supply status    5 4 PC power OFF before PC startup ON OFF N    mal Normal l Not executed   power ON  communication  PC power startup  power ON or restart  Abnormal  Ka before MELSECNET H driver startup PA Normal    Disconnected    Not executed  communication    When the system is shut down    External PC Host station status  Status power    1   Communication xw d3  power   Loop status    x2 Data link    supply status          PC power OFF before external power ON OFF Normal Normal l Not executed  supply OFF communication  Loopback Abnormal  Ea External power supply OFF  Disconnected  Not executed     1  The status can be checked on the network monitor screen of the MELSECNET H utility  the Network diagnostics of GX  Developer connected to other station   s PLC or at areas SW91 to SW9A    x2  The status can be checked on each station status screen of the MELSECNET H utility  the Network diagnostics of GX  
246. t   gt  F539FFFFH l 11  1 0 Port  FCUI lt    gt FCFFH l 11  Status  Normal Board Reset                  Device Monitor   Exit   Help      channel   sets the channel  MELSECNET H board  perform the memory  I O diagnosis     Displays the address where the diagnosis is being performed  the number of times it is  Diagnosis  uk na    OoOo performed and the status       Start   Button Starts the memory  I O Starts the memory  l O diagnosis         Stop   Button Stops the memory  I O diagnosis   Board Reset   Button Resets the MELSECNET H board        TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 2 10 Target screen operation    This operation sets the logical station No  for access to a multiple CPU system or  Redundant CPU system              PRIMELSECNET H utility    Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory I O Test Target   Driver   LI        r Channel 151 MELSECNET H  1 slot  J      m Logical StaNo  66                Set    Network No    1    Sta  No   3      Multiple PLC specify   No Specification Y  MELSECNET H Redundant PLC specify   Standby system                m Target Setting List    lLogical___ Network No   Sta No   Multiple PLC Change    ZERRE     No Specification fedri  Delete                        channel  sets the channel  MELSECNET H board  perform the target settings     Logical Sta  No  Input the ae sta  No  which is setting or changing the settings    Network No  Input the network No  of the station doing the accessing     Input
247. t  RD       RD  Retum as control station x   F LOOP   R LOOR                Device Monitor    Channel Sets a channel  MELSECNET H board  to be used     Own Station Information Displays information and changes setting on the host     Resets the MELSECNET H board to renew the information of the MELSECNET H board  Board Seti button selected in Channel     Performs mode setting for the MELSECNET H board  and displays the present value     Description  Online  auto  reconnection  _ Used for normal communication     i Enters the state in which there is no connection to the  Offline  network     Forward loop Check the forward loop status   Check the reverse loop status        Perform station to station test   Test between master station     Select at control station      Perform station to station test  Test between slave station      Select at normal station     Check the hardware including the cable and  communication circuit for transmission system by the  MELSECNET H board     Internal self loopback test Check the hardware including the communication circuit  P for transmission system by the MELSECNET H board     H W test Check the hardware of the MELSECNET H board     Self loopback test    Selects the transmission speed   When the Q80BD J71LP21G  Q80BD J71LP21GE and Q80BD J71BR11 is used and  when  MNET10 Mode  is selected in the NET Mode   25 Mbps  cannot be selected     10 Mbps Selected when the MELSECNET H  10 Mbps  is connected   25 Mbps Selected when the MELSECNET H  25 Mb
248. t  Set the mode setting on  Forward loop test    Reverse loop test  or  Online   then    click the   Board Set   button     This operation is performed in the order of control station     normal station      3  Checking the test results  Click the   Board Set   button in the  Board Information  screen in the MNETH    utility to run the forward loop reverse loop test  and check the execution state by  the status of the LED s in the  Board Information  screen   If T  PASS blinks 20 times and ERROR LED does not blink  the test is completed  normally   Also  if the test ends abnormally  the ERROR LED or the L LERR LED will blink as  shown below to indicate the relevant error information   1  The  TIME    DATA  and  UNDER  LED s blink on the F LOOP and  R LOOP sides     The cable or the other station is abnormal and loop back occurred   2  The  CRC    OVER  and  AB IF  LED s blink on the F LOOP and R LOOP  sides     The cable is defective   3  The  TIME  and  DATA  LED s blink on the F L OOP and R LOOP sides     The wiring is wrong   Check and correct the cable connections before and after the station  where the error occurred     6   30 6   30    7 PARAMETER SETTIN      MELSEC       7 PARAMETER SETTINGS    It is necessary to set the MELSECNET H board s parameters using the MNETH utility  in order to operate the MELSECNET H    In setting of the parameters  after the MELSECNETHH is selected  it can be set even to  the details of the application functions    A flow chart of the sett
249. t  User Accounts      User Accounts  Change your account picture     Add or remove user accounts  Change your Windows password    9  Windows CardSpace       Manage Information Cards that are used to log on to online services    Additional Options    Classic View                      4  Select  Turn User Account Control on or off      see  Geez   Control Panel    User Accounts    User Accounts    4   search 2   a a ee             Make changes to your user account  Change your password  anal  Remove your password  Change your picture Password protected    Change your account name      Change your account type      Change my environment a  variables    Manage another account       Tum User Acco    Control on or off                                           r    cees  5  Deselect  Turn on User Account Control  UAC  to  rey Jo  i    User Accounts  gt  Turn User Account Control On or Off    4   Search    2 Ri  TEDE EEE make your computer more secure  and click the  Turn on User Account Control  UAC  to make your computer more secure    User Account Control  UAC  can help prevent unauthorized changes to your computer  We recommend that O K b tt  you lesve UAC turned on to help protect your computer  utton         Use User Account Control  UAC  to help protect your computer                               l     Setting completion     App   13 App   13    APPENDIX MELSEC        b  Using Windowse 7    E Getting Started   E 1  Select  Start     Control Panel    mz Connect to a Projector  
250. tely  T type           gt       lt         T type  sold separately   connector connector   A6BR10 accessory    ye  A6BR10 accessory     Terminal resistor  A6RCON R75  sold separately     For details about the repeater module  A6BR10   refer to the following user s manual    attached to the product   Model AGBR10 A6BR10 DC MELSECNET 10 Coaxial Bus System    Repeater Module User s Manual  IB 66499     6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION                                                         MELSEC  3  With a repeater module  branch connection   Normal station Normal station  Control station Station No  2 Station No  3  Station No  1 QJ71BR11 QJ71BR11  Personal  computer F type connector F type connector F type connector       T type connector   A6BR10 accessory      f  Terminal resistor Coaxial cable A6BR10   Coaxial cable eee  A6RCON R75   sold separately   sold separately   Normal station Normal station  Station No  4 Station No  n n lt 32  QJ71BR11 QJ71BR11  Terminal resistor  A6RCON R75   sold separately  F type connector F type connector  T type connector       A6BR10 accessory  E                            Ji    Coaxial cable Terminal resistor  A6RCON R75   sold separately     By setting stations that will be connected in future  stations that are included in  the number of stations but not actually connected  as reserved stations  a  communication error can be prevented and the link scan time will not be  affected     The two connectors of the F type c
251. the      IV sub controlling station when the Year  Month   Day  Hour a Sec       controlling station is down     F 1    IT    Secured data send 4   l 3     li  T Secured data receive   E       Transient setting 4  Maximum no of transients   gt  Ti 2  in1 scan  me el  Maximum no of transients   gt  Ti ji    _ in one station Lt hal E  NE e E nne  Check Cancel Help       12 2    12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS       MELSEC    12 2 1 Send range settings    12 3    Each station s send range of link devices  low speed LB  low speed LW  is assigned to  the extended area  2000 to 3FFF  in 16 point units for LB  start  O LI  O 0 to end OO  O F  and in one point units for LW    Each station s send range can also be assigned using a random station number  assignment sequence      1  Device range    On 2000   SFFFH   8192   16383     Normal cyclic transmission area Extended function area       i 1  j j  i i  j j   gt   gt      g           2  Screen settings  This shows in the case where 768 points of the transmission range for each  station is assigned to  Low Speed LB  Low Speed LW  in the  Common  parameter setting  B  W Setting   screen in the MNETH utility        Send Range for Each Station         Sta ne LB  Lw  Low Speed Li  Low Speed Lijra    0000   gt 00FF 0000 lt   gt 00FF 2000 lt   gt 22FF 2000 lt   22FF    0100   gt 01FF 0100 lt   gt 01FF 2300 lt   gt 25FF 2300 lt   gt 25FF    0200 lt   gt 02FF 0200 lt   gt 02FF 2600 lt   gt 28FF 2600 lt   28FF    0300 lt  03FF 0300s  gt 03FF 2900 lt
252. the coaxial cable  to the cable      1  Using a BNC connector manufactured by DDK Ltd   The following explains how to connect the BNC P 3 NiCAu or BNC P 5 NiCAu to  the cable     Z  NCAUTION e Correctly solder coaxial cable connectors  Incorrect soldering may result in  malfunction      a  Structure of the BNC connector and coaxial cable    Parts comprising the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable    SD      External conductor     amp  Nut Washer Gasket Insulating material Outer sheath    Plug shell O DP    Clamp Contact Internal conductor        b  How to attach the BNC connector and the coaxial cable    1  Cut the portion of the outer sheath of the coaxial cable as shown in the    figure below   ERE     TURAN Q 3C 2V 15mm  0 59 in    eke 5C 2V  5C 2V CCY 10mm  0 39 in      Cut this portion of the outer sheath            2  Fit the nut  washer  gasket  and clamp onto the coaxial cable  as  shown below  and then loosen the external conductor        Gasket    3  Cut the external conductor  insulation material and internal conductor  to the dimensions shown below  However  cut the external conductor  to the same dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smooth  it down to the clamp     Internal Insulation  conductor material          6mm 3mm  3C 2V  0 24 in      0 12 in     e    7mm 5mm   gt l clamp and SERAV  SACOM   sein     q   2    n     external conductor    6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION       MELSEC    4  Solder the contact to the i
253. tility   gt  K   MS DOS Prompt  LJ Windows Explorer   3       Stat      1  When Windows   95  Windows   98  Windows   NT or Windows   2000 is used    Programs  is displayed     2  The error viewer is available only when Windows   95 or Windows   98 is used    TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 1 2 Ending a utility  The following explains how to end an utility      1  To end the MNETH utility  click the button at the bottom of the utility screen     PAMELSECNET H utility SBE  Board lst   Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status   Er history monitor   Memory 1 0 Test   Target 4    gt      Board List    ChannelNo  Board Name IRQ No  Port Memory 1 0 Port Version     1  Sl MNET  H optical fiber  11 F5380000 lt   gt F539FFFFH FCOO lt   gt FCFFH 1B          Channel No  Setting          Device Monitor    Click      2  To end the device monitor utility  click  Menu     Exit  from the menu bar   When a dialog box is displayed  click the button     g Device Monitor Utility      Menu Setting Device Write Da  Batch mantar  16 point register monitor                 Click      3  To end the error viewer  click  Log     Exit  menu from the menu bar       Log View Help  Driver  Basic Middle Ware  Applied Middle Ware  Others       Open the Selected File        Save With aame       Delete       Log Setting          Click     TILITY OPERATION  _ Z 2 MELSEC       9 1 3 Displaying the help screen  The following explains how to display the utility s help screen      1  To display the 
254. ting    The supplementary settings are included in the common parameter settings  They can  be used when more specific applications are required  The default settings should  normally be used    The supplementary settings  common parameter settings  are required only for the  control station  The parameters are sent from the control station to normal stations  when the network starts up    Perform the supplementary settings with the  Common parameter setting  screen of  the MNETH utility     7 PARAMETER SETTINGS       MELSEC    7 5 Control Station Return Setting    This parameter is used to designate the type of station used by the control station  when returning to the network in the control station return control    Select this parameter to make the control station return as a normal station without  stopping the baton pass in the system in operation    The control station return setting is required only for the control station      1  When  Return as control station  is selected  default     The baton pass  cyclic transmission  transient transmission  etc   temporarily  stops because the control station sends the parameters to the normal stations  and returns to the network      2  When  Return as normal station  is selected    The control station returns to the network as a normal station  without stopping  the baton pass in the network     PAMELSECNET uty O PIE    Board list Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory 1 0 Test   Targ
255. tion     Direct access to link dev  CeS     H HHH HHK K  kk kk kk kk keka kre keka k   ka k   Ka KAK KAK AKA KAK A KA KAK KK kK KK KAK AWIR Section 12 1  functions    Cyclic transmission function        Low speed cyclic transmisSs  on              H    H  Hmmmmm rrr Section 12 2   Periodical communication      Transient transmission function Communication FUNCTION        H   A kre kH   Section 12 3 1   Non periodical communication  Routing j   H  TA Hila 0E DD e T A Section 12 3 2  Group FUNCTION BOEERDDDDDDJDN gt E NJS gt   JDMMMDMDMDMDMDDMDMDIIDIDEEEEDDDDnEau DMDRZDNRIMDWMD  I  iI   nDn nDIEF  Section 12 3 3  SEND RECV function  H  H6HH6x6xxhmmmmrmmm rrr rrr rr rrr rrr rrr Section 12 3 4      Multiple transmission function  Optical loop SyStem          HH HHHHH6m mm rrr ekere kek KAK Keke Section 12 4      Redundant CPU system function   Pairing setting              receereeeeeetee tee tetee cette tee tee tener tetnetee Heker n Section 7 3 6             x1  For application of the redundant CPU system to the Q corresponding  MELSECNETHH  refer to  Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System  Reference Manual  PLC to PLC network       12 1 Direct Access to the Link Devices    The link devices  LB  LW  LX  LY  SB  SW  of the MELSECNET H board can be  directly read from written to the user program by the driver setting    By directly accessing the link devices  the link refresh time and the transmission delay  time can be shortened    However  in direct access  since block guara
256. to 25 Mbps  mounting multiple boards with the same  network No  is not allowed  Doing so may cause errors at all stations at the time of  OS startup shutdown or when resetting the board  If multiple boards with the same  network No  should be installed  set the communication speed to 10Mbps     14 14 14 14    14 TROUBLESHOOTIN  OU SHOOTING MELSEC       14 4 5 Flowchart to use when unable to achieve data link for specific station    An error occurs      1  When a faulty station is detected  check if the data link cable of the faulty  station is connected properly   If the data link cable is disconnected  make sure to power off the personal  computer and external power supply before reconnecting the cable                  Detect a faulty station using MNETH utility  and each station status screen                   Is there any faulty station with error  Is the parameter correct  Check the control station s parameter         programmable controller                Is the data link disabled station PC  Check the programmable controller program        User program       MNETH utility  Check each setting for MNETH utility         Check the user program          Is the faulty station s NO     RUN  LED lit               Is the faulty station a PC     M    Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H  Network System Reference Manual   PLC to PLC network                   Refer to Section 14 4 1                 Did the data link  return to normal                 Complete      NO        Is t
257. ts and malfunctions may result in  serious accidents    e If a coaxial cable is disconnected  this may destabilize the line  and a data link communication  error may occur in multiple stations  Make sure to create an interlock circuit in the sequence  program so that the system will operate safely even if the above error occurs  Failure to do so  may result in a serous accident due to faulty output or malfunctions    e Provide a safety circuit outside the programmable controller so that the entire system will  operate on the safety side even when an error occurs with the personal computer    There is a risk of an accident due to faulty output or malfunctioning     1  Construct circuits outside the programmable controller  including an emergency stop circuit   protection circuit  interlock circuit for reciprocal operations such as forward and reverse  and  interlock circuit for positioning high and low limits to prevent damage to the equipment     2  If the station in which the board is installed is disconnected from the data link due to a data  link error  the data output from that station and written in other stations will remain the same  as immediately before the error occurred in the data link  This data will be retained until the  data link for that station is reopened  returned to system     Provide a mechanism to monitor the status of data link and handle errors for each station  that is connected to the data link system         Design Instructions     ZA CAUTION    e 
258. ts are subject to change without prior notice     Microsoft  Windows  Windows NT  Windows Vista  Windows Server  Visual Basic  Visual C    Visual Studio are  registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries   Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States     Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates   All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their    respective companies        MELSECNET H Interface Board  User s Manual  For SWODNC MNETH B        MODEL   SWO MNETH B U E       MODEL    ones 13JR24             SH NA  080128 Y 1212 KWIX             aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION    HEAD OFFICE   TOKYO BUILDING  2 7 3    CHIYODA KU  TOKYO 100 8310  JAPAN  NAGOYA WORKS   1 14   YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME   HIGASHI KU  NAGOYA   JAPAN       When exported from Japan  this manual does not require application to the  Ministry of Economy  Trade and Industry for service transaction permission        Specifications subject to change without notice     
259. twork No  Sta No  z    3 y 3   j   2 j       et  m Setting Data    Change    Delete        No   Transfer to Network  Intermediate Network _  Intermediate Sta No        D 2 1          p Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot          F Composition only of MELSECNET H network    Cancel   Help      Input the number of the line to set or change   Setting range   1 to 64     Transfer to Network No  Input the transfer destination network number    Intermediate Network No  Input the relay destination network number    Intermediate Sta  No  Input the relay destination station number   button Enters the data that has been set in Set data     i Displays a list of data that has been set so far   bution Selecting a line to be changed and clicking the button will change the entered set data    Double clicking the line to be changed also does the same operation    button Selecting a line to delete and clicking the button will delete the entered set data     Selects the channel No  where the settings are to be changed   If the routing function from the MELSECNET H board is used and the programmable  controller CPU is accessed  when the configuration of the network system is the  MELSECNETHH only  click the check box and add a check mark   1   1  If a MELSECNET 10 board exists in the network  do not add a check mark to the  check box  The maximum transmitted data size differs in the MELSECNET H  and the MELSECNET 10  1920 bytes in the MELSECNET H and 960 bytes in the  MELSECNET 10   so there is dan
260. twork System Reference Manual       6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       6 2 Installation    This section explains precautions when handling the MELSECNET H board and the  installation environment     6 2 1 Precautions when handling    The following are precautions to be noted when handling the MELSECNET H board        CAUTION e Fasten the board securely using the installation screws and tighten the installation  screws securely within the specified torque range    If the screws are loose  this may cause malfunctioning   If the screws are tightened too much  this could cause damage to the screws or  unit  leading to malfunctioning   For the tightening torque of the board installation screws  refer to the handling  instructions supplied with the personal computer    e Do not directly touch the conductive section of the board   Doing so could result in malfunctioning or breakdown of the board    e Before handling the board  touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static  electricity from the human body   Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction of the board    e Install the board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI  Express   standard  Refer to  Section 2 5 Operating Environment     Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction    e Handle the board in a location where there is no static electricity   Static electricity could result in failure or malfunctioning    e The board is packed in a bag 
261. utility s help screen  click the button at the lower right     hand corner of the utility screen     PAMELSECNET H utility SBE    Board list   Board information   Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory I O Test   Target 4    gt           Board List    Channel No  Board Name IRQ No  Port Memory 1 0 Port Version    1 jT MET     j  T o    FONcFOYEN fe  zilan anan   N    S   HE   FET   5          EI      lan imal           f Channel No  Confirm   Channel No  Setting             Device Monitor    Click      2  To display the help screen for the device monitor utility and error viewer  click   Help     Help  from the menu bar     munication Support  flew   Help       9 UTILITY OPERATIONS MELSEC       9 1 4 Verifying the version  The following explains how to verify the utility version      1  To verify the utility s version  click the  Version  tab     PA MELSECNET H utility SSE           lt   SWODNC MNETH B DIA I   Click    a  a MELSECNET H utility 2000 10 30    Copyright C  2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION  All Rights Reserved        Device Monitor Help        2  To verify the version information for the device monitor utility and error viewer   click  Help     Version  from the menu bar     munication Support So    lew   Help   D Help Tin    Click     9 UTILITY OPERATIONS       MELSEC    When Help is run  the following  Windows Help and Support  screen may appear   and the Help screen is not displayed   Perform the following procedure to install    Win
262. ve using the crimp tool with attention paid to the  orientations of the crimp tool and connector   Do not pull the cable when crimping the sleeve                             Before connecting or disconnecting the coaxial connector  touch a grounded metal  object to discharge the static electricity from the human body  Failure to do so may  result ina MELSECNET H board malfunction        6 PROCEDURE AND SETTINGS UP TO THE POINT OF OPERATION  MELSEC       6 4 4 External power supply cable wiring    This section explains how to connect the external power supply cable to the Q80BD   J71LP21S 25      1  Connection steps  Connect the external power supply cable to the Q80BD J71LP21S 25 in the  following steps     Check if necessary parts have been prepared        Refer to  2  in this section  Make an external power supply cable       Refer to  3  in this section    y    Connect the external power supply cable     Refer to  4  in this section  to the Q80BD J71LP21S 25              End     2  Parts and tool required for making an external power supply cable  To make an external power supply cable  the following parts and a tool are  required     a  Connector set  Accessory     Check that the following parts are contained in the connector set supplied  with the product     Applicable cable size Quantity    78883  Tt  Contacting pin 175218 2 AWG 20 16 3  1 spare         b  Cable  Use an external power supply cable with heat resistant vinyl sheath of 0 50  to 1 25mm   AWG 20 16      c  
263. with the forward loop side s optical fiber cable is checked  The  Forward loop test hardware test operation is selected   For details  refer to section 6 6 2   Forward loop   Reverse loop test    The connection state with the reverse loop side s optical fiber cable is checked  The    Reverse loop test hardware test operation is selected   For details  refer to section 6 6 2   Forward loop   Reverse loop test       __  Selects the control station side for performing the hardware test for checking the lines  Test between master station   j j    r  between two stations  For details  refer to section 6 6 1   Station to station test      Selects the normal station side for performing the hardware test for checking the lines  between two stations  For details  refer to section 6 6 1   Station to station test    Selects a hardware test of the MELSECNET H board itself with the connection cables     Test between slave station    Self loopback test  isd halen For details  refer to section 6 5 1   Self loopback test      For details  refer to section 6 5 2   Internal self loopback test    For details  refer to section 6 5 3   H W test         7 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC       7 2 6 Parameter setting example    An example of setting the MELSECNET H board parameters is shown below      1  System example       MELSECNETH H  25 Mbps   Network No  1                   Onlinefauto reconnection     x     merme  lt    F LOOP   R LOOP                7 PARAMETER SETTIN  eee MELSEC       7 3 Common
264. xecuted in one link scan by one  network  total for 1 network as a whole      Valid setting  1 to 255 times  Default  2 times    Sets the number of transients that can be executed in one link scan by one  station     Valid setting  1 to 10 times  Default  2 times     in 1 sca collected and sent one station at a time in 1 link scan   setting  Valid setting interval  1 to 65535 s    Carries out low speed cyclic transmission in accordance with the preset  time   Settings  Year  Month  Day  Hour  Minute  Second    1  Data separation prevention is when older data with the meaning of 2 word  32 bit  link data such as the    positioning unit   s current position are prevented from being separated into new data with 1 word  16 bit   units due to cyclic transmission timing     Maximum No  of transients in       TILITY OPERATION  ale    a MELSEC       9 2 6 Loop monitor screen operation    This screen is used to monitor the loop status of the host     JH MELSECNETXH utility ME x     Board lst   Board information Loop monitor   Each sta status   Err history monitor   Memory 1 0 Test   Target 4    gt      r Channel  51 MELSECNET H  1 slot        a z r Error Information  r Own Station Information ba    nan  Network No  Group No  Sta No  Control   Normal Sta  P    F Loop Status    fi jo fi  Control Sta  P Normal                RLoopStatus  Normal    r Loop Status F Loop Back  Mode Station    7 R Loop Back     Onine Station       Comm  Status Loop Back     Normal       Loo  Not in execution
265. y      For Windows   NT and Windows   95  the icon of MNETH utility may remain on the    Start menu even after uninstallation  Reboot the personal computer after  uninstallation      MELSECPowerManager may not be uninstalled depending on the installation  state which affects the other installed software packages   For details of MELSECPowerManager  refer to Appendix 11         3  When uninstallation is completed normally  When the uninstallation is completed normally  the icons registered in the  Windows    Start menu are deleted     8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE  MELSEC        4  When uninstallation is failed  When the uninstallation is failed  perform the following procedure   1  Insert the CD ROM to the CD ROM drive   2  Display the  Run  screen from the Windows   Start menu   3  Append   A  and execute  Setup exe  of the CD ROM     A 21x     E   Type the name of a program  Folder  document  or  Internet resource  and Windows will open it For you     Open    D  Disk1 SETUP EXE  A X    Cancel Browse          4  Install the software package by following the installation procedure   5  Uninstall the software package     8 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE  MELSEC       MEMO    TILITY OPERATION  _   a MELSEC       9 UTILITY OPERATIONS  9 1 Utility Common Operations    This section explains the common operations for each utility     Logon as a user who has administrator authority    1  x1  When a utility is run while user account control  UAC
266. ystem and Security    Administrative Tools    3  Double click  Services                        ae  Bisse Neme Type Size  BE Destop J   Component Services Shortcut 2x8  J   Downloads Bl Computer Management Shortcut 210  SE  Recent Places By Data Sources  0080  Shortcut 2x8   E Event Viewer shortcut   SS libraries E   iRCSL Initiator  2009054 PM Shortcut  E documents dik Local Security Policy  2011230 PM  Shortcut  ob Music   s yene Menor       2009 9 5  PM Shortcut       E Pictures gagement  20112 30PM_ Shortcut  B Videos 7 13 2009 8 54 PM Shortcut  a Tonfiguration 3 2000 853 PM Shortcut 2e  j8 Computer   Task Scheduler 2 13 2009 9 54PM Shortcut 2K38     7 61 en IC  d   Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 7 13 2009 9 54 PM  Shortcut 2x  a 2003 x64 jp  D  ai  Windows Memory Diagnostic 7 13 2009 9 53 PM Shortcut 2KB  Ea Date Disk  E  EB Windows Powershell Modules 7 13 2009 1032  M Shortcut 36    a 2008 264 en  F   Ea 2008R2 964 jp  6     ie Network    14 items                i   To next page     App   30 App   30    APPENDIX MELSEC        From preceding page  4  Check if MELSECPowerManager is registered                 Services       File Acton View Hep  es EI Ei    l   i m    a               Services  Loc          Startup Type        MELSECPowerManager          The Offline    Started                      Beended  Standard                   j   Setting completion     e When MELSECPowerManager is disabled  the personal computer may enter the  power save mode  hibernate  sleep
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
取扱説明書 - Amazone  PMDX-105 I/O Option Riser Board User`s Manual  Manual Del Propietario    HP 15 15-g042ds  Manual de usuario VAI 3 mono Manual de Usuario Tipo de  Mora VT 526 WC  Lite Version 1.0 User Manual  エコキュート ワンポイントガイド  Motorola Radio GP320 User's Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file